Service Manual Solea 100 (En) (2014-V01)

Service manual
Solea 100
Service Manual
Version: SM_Solea 100_en_Dez2014_V01
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Table of content
General safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Graphic Symbols.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Analyzer units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Analyzer preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Hardware Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Linux GUI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Module description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Maintenance program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Starting the module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
System parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Reagent preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Test selections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Test parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Test ASTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copy test from/ to USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Backup/ restore data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Exit.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Starting the module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sampler positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sampler Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Optics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Liquid System.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
EPROMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Comterm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Exit.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
www.biolabo.fr 1
Service manual
Casing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Case segment removing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Cover removing for service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Needle:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Syringe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Sampler position.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Liquid Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Water sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Measuring block paralysm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Configuration on GUI surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Backup and restore options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Preventive maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Mechanical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Functional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Trouble shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

PC and Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Dispensing and liquid system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cuvette rack transport system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Measuring results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Result error flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Messages.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Software Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Operating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Analyzer Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Analyzer Installation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Installation procedure summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Description of installation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Information for return shipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Printer installation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Communication of PC with the host computer (serial). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
www.biolabo.fr 3
Service manual
General safety information
Table of content
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
www.biolabo.fr 5
Service manual
Safety Information
Read and follow this information before using the analyzer.
All biological substances should be regarded as a potential source of infection!
Wear gloves when handling blood, blood samples and objects contaminated by blood!
DANGER!
Strictly follow the existing regulations pertaining to the handling and manipulation of reagents and blood samples
for laboratory use!
IMPORTANT!
This instrument shall only be operated by trained specialists, who have been instructed and trained in Vitro Diag-
nostica procedures. They must be familiar with the instructions and able to work accordingly in order to fully utilize
the t411’s functionality.
IMPORTANT!
This product is an in vitro diagnostic medical device. It complies with the requirements of the directive 98/79/CE
and the standards mentioned in the certificate supplied with it. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential, commercial or ”light
industrial” environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed
in accordance with measures stated in the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communi-
cations. We recommend that you observe the different warnings inscribed on the instrument itself and indicated in
the documentation supplied.
CAUTION!
Follow all warnings and notes affixed to the instrument or mentioned in the instructions.
CAUTION!
Intervention in and modification of the product, not explicitly approved by the equipment manufacturer, may result
in loss of operative effectiveness. The costs for necessary repairs are to be borne by the user. If the equipment is
used in a manor deviating from the specifications of the manufacturer, the protection can be impaired or be without
function.
ATTENTION!
The equipment manufacturer is not liable for any damage resulting from disregard of the specifications stated in
these instructions, damage caused by handling of reagents and biological fluids, or other action with the product
not in conformity with these instructions.
CAUTION!
Data processing equipment connected to the instrument, such as personal computers or printers, must conform to
the EN 60950 or UL 601950, respectively.
tions contain information necessary for operating the analyzer.
CAUTION! It is strongly recommended that the user reads and understands these instructions in order to fully
utilize the analyzers capacity!
6
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Warnings
These instructions contain information necessary for operating the analyzer.
CAUTION! It is strongly recommended that the user reads and understands these instructions in order to fully
utilize the analyzers capacity!
Meaning of the warnings used in these instructions.
DANGER! This information is for your own safety.

CAUTION! Information for optimum analyzer use.
www.biolabo.fr 7
Service manual
Graphic Symbols
ON (mains switch)
OFF (mains switch)
Caution, observe documentation
Warning of dangerous high voltage
Warning of a hot surface
Warning of a biological hazard
Warning of hand injuries
Warning of laser beam
Keep steel balls out of magnetic fields! (Speakers, CRT, monitors etc.)
Please refer to the user manual
Returned goods and environmentally compliant disposal.This instrument is clas-

sified as a Category 8 product according to ElektroG (medical products with the
exception of implanted or infectious products). This instrument does not fall under
the RoHS Directive. As required by WEEE 2002/96/EG and ElektroG, we mark our
instruments according to the following symbol as designated by DIN EN 50419.
This instrument is not allowed to be disposed in normal waste. Please pay atten-
tion to and follow your local provisions.
Please contact your instrument dealer for more information regarding the return of
used instruments.
All full screenshots and cropped screenshots in this manual display information intended for easier
understanding of the system and navigation of the various menu items. Some minor deviations to the illustrated
items may, however, exist.
8
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Introduction
Introduction
Table of content
The concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Analyzer units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sampler area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Control button bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Left analyzer side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
www.biolabo.fr 9
Service manual
Introduction
The concept
The analyzer is a fully automated analysis unit for clotting, chromogenic and immunologic tests.
Emergencies can be integrated into the working routine.
A cuvette bar is moved from the cuvette register to the pipetting position. This is where
the plasma and reagent is pipetted into the cuvette.
The sampler and the dilutor carry out all procedures having to do with the distribution of sample and
reagent. This distribution occurs fully automatically according to the selection of the parameter to be
measured. Patient samples are taken from test tubes located in sample racks in a pipetting area with 31
sample positions. The reagents are stored in the cooled reagent area with positions for 20 reagents positions for
calibrators and controls. and reagent.
The collection and distribution of liquids is accomplished with a needle that, between the singular steps,
is washed from the in- and outside. To decontaminate the needle, a cleaning solution is drawn up into the
probe dependent on the parameters to be measured.
After pipetting, the cuvette rack is moved into the incubation unit.
After the incubation time has lapsed, the rack is moved into the measuring block.
When tilting starts, the ball is located in the upper part of the cuvette. When the tilting progresses, the ball runs
into the drops and transports them to the bottom of the cuvette. The convergence of reagent and plasma starts the
measuring process.
The ball rotates during the entire measuring time. When clotting sets in, the rotating ball causes the
forming fibrin fibres to bind. This effect enables the detection of smallest blood clots.
After measuring, the cuvette bar is ejected or, if there are still unused cuvettes in the rack, returned
back to the pipetting station.The measuring system
10
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Introduction
Ball function
1. Excellent reproducibility 1. normal plasma

due to the gentle mixing
of the sample. In the
normal range the ball’s
rotation is stopped by the
strong blood clot. Here the
concentration of the blood
clot has only little effect on
the signal dynamics due to
the rotation of the ball.
with ball
2. In case of abnormal
2. abnormal plasma
samples, the ball withoiut ball
concentrates the blood clot
in the path. The dynamics
of the clouding difference
between the fluid and
clotted sample are very
high. This leads to positive
detection of the beginning
of clotting.
3. abnormal plasma
with low fibrinogen
3. In case of low fibrinogen
contents, the forming
fibrin bonds to the ball.
This bonding of the fibrin
to the ball causes quick
brightening of the sample
with a large dynamic signal.
www.biolabo.fr 11
Service manual
Introduction
Analyzer units
The sampler moves the needle to the correct positions for pipetting, cleaning, and maintenance actions samples
from the sample area and liquids from the uncooled reagent area.
ID Description
2 5
Sampler area
Cuvette rack register
Analyzer connectors
4
Dilutor 3
Signal bar
Control button bar 1

6
12
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Introduction
Sampler area
ID Description
Sampler area
5
Analyzer connectors
Dilutor 1
4
2
Signal bar
Protective cover
Needle 3
Sampler arm (X/Y axis)
ID Description
10
Washstation
Clean position
1 2 3
Buffer position
4
Reference point
5
Sample positions
8
Control/ Calibration
6
positions
Predilution rack 9
7
www.biolabo.fr 13
Service manual
Introduction
Sample area
At the sample area is the sample rack (plasma block) located .
The sample rack is removeable to load more comfortible the sample tube to the rack.
The rack is traced by an sensor.

Stores the cuvette bars. (max. 58cuvette bars/ 2 stacks )
Analyzer connectors
All needed connections are located on the left side of the analyzer. For more detailes see „Left analyzer side“
Dilutor
See syringe.
Signal bar
The signal bar is an optical status indicator.
The signal bar lightning white during the routine. If an error occur the bar turns into a red blinking status.
Protective cover
The protective cover covers the sampler area to protect the samples, reagent and keep an stable enviroment.
To open the cover to load the analyzer. pull the lower metal bar upwards.
Needle
The needle is connected via the pipetting tube to the syringe. The needle aspirate and dispense fluids when the
plunger of the syringe moves up or down. Only the tip of the needle is in contact with the liquids and is washed in
the washstation. The emersion depth is controled by the software and depend on the actual process.
Sampler arm (X/Y axis)

the sampler arm moves the needle to the right position to aspirate or dispense the liquid. the axis are moved by
stepper motors and trasced by encoder.
Control button bar

Via the control buttom bar you can stop the sampler movements (stop button) and quit messages.
Sample barcode reader

The sample barcode reader is an optional feature. When it is installed, it will switch on when the protective cover is
opened. The scan window is on the left side, in front of the sample area.
Wash station
It cleans the left needle after every pipetting action which prevents carry-over between tests. From the wash station,
the cleaning water flows to a liquid waste container.
Clean position
The clean position is the position where a bottle with clean has to be placed. Clean is needed to wash the the needle
more effective and avoid contamination of the needle tip.
Buffer position
The buffer position is only used during a calibration. When a buffer for a calibration is needed, the program expect
the buffer on this position.
Reference point
The feference point is used to check the needle in their position and straightness.
Sample position
Area on which you load sample racks with sample tubes.
Control/ Calibration positions
14
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Introduction
Predilution rack
The analyzer dilutes samples and reagents on dedicated predilution bars.
Reagent positions
This area has slots in which you insert the reagent racks so that the analyzer can use the loaded substances. You also
unload racks directly here, for removal and replacement of substances.
The first position of every slot is a “mixing position”.
Pipetting position
Area where the transfer unit aspirates samples for the test.
Control button bar
ID Description
Stop button
Alarm off button

1 2
Stop button
The stop button stop emeadiately the sampler movements. the already pipetted cuvette rack will be still transpor-
ted an measured. An already started measuring process will as well continued.
By activating the integrated LED light will switch on.
Alarm off button

Confirms that the operator has noted the information in a
status message or has dealt with an error message. Must be
pressed to continue processing.
Keyboard Drawer
Contain the keyboard to navigate/control the programs.
www.biolabo.fr 15
Service manual
Introduction
Left analyzer side

On the left side of the analyzer are located all required external tube and cable connetions. Additional you will find
the syringe of the dilutor.
ID Description
Syringe
Wash water connector 1
Waste water connector
EXT connetor 4
HOST connector 5
2
Main switch 6
7 10 3
Main fuses (T 3.14A )
9
8
Syringe
To aspirate and dispense fluids, the plunger of the syringe moves up and down. The highest position is also the
home position of the syringe, in which it stays when the analyzer is not pipetting. The lowest position of the plunger
is the replacement position, in which you can replace the plunger or the plunger tip.
Wash water connector

Connects the analyzer with the water container
Waste water connector

Connects the analyzer with a liquid waste container.
PC interface
USB connection to the PC all communication between PC, analyzer and host pass these port.
Wash sensor
Sensor to detect the level of the washing solution.
EXT.
Serial port, that connects to another analyzer. Both connected analyzers require only one connection to the LIS.
HOST
Serial port, for LIS connection.
Mains switch
Switches the analyzer on and off.
Fuses
Protects the analyzer from excessive electrical currents.
16
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Introduction
Mains connector
The mains cable for the power supply is connected here.
Connects the analyzer to the mains electricity.
Accessories
Cuvette rack
A cuvette bar consits of eight cuvettes and a cuvette rack frame.
The cuvette stay always in the cuvette bar frame and is designed for single
use. Inside each cuvette is a ball for stirring located.
The one side of the cuvette bar is serrated for the transportation mecha-
nism inside of the cuvette rack transport unit.
In the two holes on the upper side of the cuvettes, reagent and plasma will
be dispense from the needle.
The cuvettes are delivered in Stacks. 29 cuvette racks are combined to one
stack.
The cuvette register is able to store two stacks.
Sample rack
The sample rack (plasma rack) hold up to 31 sample tubes and four posi-
tions for controls or calibration dilutions.
Reagent block
The reagent block hold the different reagents which are used for the per-
formed test on the analyzer.
up to 20 different reagents are possible. As well control plasma can be
stored here. The reagent block is cooled to 16-18°C by a Peltier element.
Predilution rack
The dilution racks are used to dilutte the plasma before it is pipet to the
cuvette.
in one Predilution rack are 40 cups combined. Each cup is checked by the
probe before using.
www.biolabo.fr 17
Service manual
Introduction
Liquid container
he liquid container provide the fresh water for the analyzer. the level of
water is sensor traced.
The waste water container collect the waste water for proper disposal.
18
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Specifications
Specifications
This chapture describes the detailed specifications of the analyzer.
Table of content
Physical dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Ambient conditions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Disposal specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
www.biolabo.fr 21
Service manual
Specifications
Physical dimensions
The following dimension are relating only to the analyzer. Parts which has
to be installed after the unpackaging are not considered.
L= length
W= width
H= height
With packing
▪▪ L x W x H: 120cm x 80cm x 91cm
▪▪ Weight: 67kg
Without packing
▪▪ L x W x H: 71cm x 55cm x 62cm
▪▪ Weight: 36kg
Space required
The required space describes the space which is needed to install the com-
plete Analyzer incl. the accessories.
▪▪ L x W x H: 150cm x 60cm x 65cm
Power requirements
▪▪ Protection class: I
▪▪ Working voltage: 100 to 240 VAC
▪▪ Supply frequency: 50 / 60 Hz
▪▪ Power Input: VA
▪▪ Fuses: T 3.15A, UL/IEC 127, 5 x 20mm
▪▪ Over Voltage Category: II (EN61010-1:2001)
Ambient conditions
▪▪ Operating temperature:+17°C to +30°C
▪▪ Storage temperature: +10°C to +40°C
▪▪ Relative humidity: 10% to 80%
▪▪ Maximum heat output: 150W
▪▪ Sound intensity: 65 dB (A)
▪▪ Overvoltage category: II according to EN 61010 -1:2001
▪▪ Pollution degree: 2
▪▪ Usage environment: Indoor use in residential areas, commercial dwellings and light industrial environments.
Temperature specifications
▪▪ Incubation: 40.5°C ±0.8°C*
▪▪ Measuring block: 38.0°C ±0.8°C*
▪▪ Reagent cooling: 16.0°C to 22.0°C **
22
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Specifications
* Corresponds to a temperature in the cuvette of 37.0°C ±0.8°C after 3 minute waiting period and a filling volume of
220µl.
** Corresponds to a room temperature 17.0°C to 30.0°C
Disposal specification
Sample tubes
▪▪ Diameter: 12mm
▪▪ Max. length: 105mm
▪▪ Min. Length: 40mm
▪▪ Identification: Barcode or manual data input.
Reagent bottles
▪▪ Diameter: 12/14/16/18/21/22/24/26/30mm
▪▪ Identification: manually
Cuvette volume limits

▪▪ Maximal individual volume: upper hole 200 µl / lower hole 150 µl
▪▪ Minimum total volume: 150µl
▪▪ Maximum total volume: 260µl
▪▪ Secondary cup volume 160µl
Technical data
Dilutor
▪▪ Syringe 500 µl Hamilton
▪▪ Total path of the syringe: 60mm
▪▪ Total steps of the motor: 4000 steps
▪▪ Steps for 1µl: 8 steps
Sampler
Steps for 1 mm path:
▪▪ X-axis: 8 steps
▪▪ Y-axis: 8 steps
▪▪ Z-axis: 16 steps
▪▪ Needle bsorbency volume: aprox. 180 µl
Rinsing fluids:
▪▪ Water: Depends of the entered Test parameter: aprox.: 6.5 ml pro test
▪▪ Clean: Depends by the series of samples (f.e. 100 PT with cap piercing): 1.6 ml
Photometer
▪▪ Light source: LED
▪▪ Wavelength: 405nm / 620nm
▪▪ Sensor: Photodiode
www.biolabo.fr 23
Service manual
Specifications
Barcode scanner (optional)

▪▪ Scanner design: Line scanner
▪▪ Focus: Fixed focus
▪▪ Light source: Visible red light (655 nm)
▪▪ MTBF: 40,000 h
▪▪ Laser class: 2 (EN 60825-1 (A2:2001-03))
▪▪ Field of view: ≤ 50 °
▪▪ Code resolution: 0.15 mm ... 0.5 mm
▪▪ Reading distance (at code resolution): 55 mm ... 200 mm (0.5 mm)
▪▪ Scanning frequency: 400 Hz ... 1,200 Hz
Interface
▪▪ 1 USB: For communication with the PC
▪▪ 2 Serial ports: HOST: RS232 (For HOST connection)
EXT: RS232 (For connection with another Instrument (Daisy chain)
PC
The computer is an independent unit which controls all processes through a multi-tasking operating system. This
system also receives and calculates the data from measurements.
System configuration
The computer must be compatible with IBM and comply with ATX class.
The following system configuration is the minimum system requirements for a computer to be used with the
System
RAM: 2GB
HDD: 160 GB
USB: USB2.0: 4x
Mouse USB mouse: 1x
Keyboard: USB keyboard 1x
Software
Operating System: Linux (Debian 6.xx,i386 32bit)
Mass storage
External: USB memory flash (installation medium, backup)
Internal: HDD
Interfaces
USB (for connection with the PC)
USB (for backing up or loading data on the system)
Monitor
Size 17inch
Min Resolution: 1280x1024, optional
Printer (opional)
Printer with Post Script or PCL 5e or PCL6 supported.
Debian includes the drivers (Generic)
24
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Analyzer preparation
This chapture describes the checks before starting the user software. The analyzer must be installed as described in
the chapture Installation Guide.
Table of content
Hardware Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
The Login Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
User definitions and rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Before measuring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
www.biolabo.fr 25
Service manual
Hardware Checklist
Before you switch on the system (analyzer, monitor, printer, PC) connect/ check the following connections:
▪▪ Connection of the USB cable to the analyzer and to the computer.
▪▪ Connection of the monitor cable to the computer.
▪▪ Connection of the keyboard to the computer.
▪▪ Connection ofthe mouse to the computer
▪▪ Connection of the printer cable from the printer to the computer.
▪▪ Connection of the mains cables (Analyzer, printer, monitor and computer) to the mains socket.
▪▪ Connection to the host computer (if available).
▪▪ The cuvette register is filled with cuvettes bars.
▪▪ The water container is filled with distilled or de-ionised water.
▪▪ The waste water container is empty
▪▪ Water and waste-liquid tubes is connected to the analyzer as well as the water sensor cable.
▪▪ The pipetting tubes to the dilutor and the probe are installed.
▪▪ The condition and position of the Hamilton syringes.
▪▪ The cuvette rgister is filled up and the solid waste is emtpy.
The instrument, printer, monitor and the PC should be switched on in this order.
26
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Login
The Login Screen

The login screen will appear after the computer has been turned on and the boot sequence has completed. Login
under the appropriate username (labhead, routine or service). You can select one option in the column by using the
Mouse or navigate by the Keyboard.
User definitions and rights
Login as service:
To Login as service , type „service“ in the field USER NAME and enter the password in the field PASSWORD Press e. The
OS desktop will appear. At this surface you have several options to start the different programs to setup the analy-
zer, change systemparameter or use OS features.
Login as Adjusting:
To login as „adjusting“ type in the field USER NAME and enter the password in the field PASSWORD. Press e.The Ad-
justing program will directly load. The user have full access to all features.
Login as Maintenance:
To login as „maintenance“ type in the field USER NAME and enter the password in the field PASSWORD. Press e.The
maintenance program will directly load. The user have full access to all features.
Login as labhead or routine:

The routine software will start. By using the login as labhead more rights and settings are possible than the routine
user.
Additional options Labhead:
Depending on the setting of the option SYSTEM TYPE in SYSTEM PARAMETER the Ladhead has following additionalrights
Standard:
The test parameters are visible and changeable. The Labhead can apply changes to calibration settings, reagent
settings and QC settings and have full access to calibration curves.
When restricted user interface is enabled:
The system displays the test parameters, but not modifiable. The Labhead can apply changes to calibration settings,
reagent settings and QC settings and have full access to calibration curves.
Independing features of the systemtype:
▪▪ Set passwords for the users 1-9
▪▪ Perform a CV run. In the Tab appear a new column „N“ Here is to enter the number of runs to be performed.
▪▪ All QC results perform as login Lebhead is not shown in the login ROUTINE..
www.biolabo.fr 27
Service manual
Before measuring
▪▪ After the login into the routne program the System initzialisate.
▪▪ Prepare and load all neccessary reagents, disposals, and cleaner.
▪▪ Wait until the analyzer is warm up. The message „System ready“ appears in the
message box. when the analyzer is in operation temperature.
▪▪ Prime the system via „Hardware> Fill system
▪▪ Check the position and straightness needle via the option Hardware > test position
▪▪ Check the needle and pipetting syste via the option Hardware > Needle check.
▪▪ The analyzer is now ready for measuring. For futher instructions see User manual.
28
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Linux GUI
Linux GUI
This chapture describes the functions of the different icons on the service desktop GUI
Service login is required to have access to the desktop..
Table of content
Module description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Analyzer interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installation tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Troubleshooting tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Database management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Statistical evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
www.biolabo.fr 29
Service manual
Linux GUI
Module description
Analyzer interface
Routine
Starts the main, routine program. Please refer to the
instruction manual for further information.
Routine with protocol

This module has the same function as the routine.
In addition, a protocol will be made.
This is only for trouble shot purposes.
Maintenance
System parameters, test parameters,
reagent parameters, backup and restore functions.
Adjusting
Sampler position management,
test and functionally control of the individual components.
Adjusting with protocol

This module has the same function as the adjusting program.
In addition, a protocol will be made.
This is only for trouble shot purposes.
30
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Linux GUI
Installation tools
Thrombolyzer installation
Installation of software updates.
Config printers
Setting up a printer.
Config keyboard
Setting up a keyboard layout and language.
Config LAN
Setting up a LAN network connection for database or LIS.
Config DateTime
Setting up the system date and time which is used
for the user interface. Time and date setting is
protected with the root password.
www.biolabo.fr 31
Service manual
Linux GUI
Troubleshooting tools
Behnk
Access to the software - only for guided troubleshooting.
USB view
Display the connected USB devices.
Snapshot
The possibility to make screenshots.
Manuals
Here are the Service and User manual for the instrument
(Version depend of software delivery date).
Database management
Copy service
Save database, all results (without response curves),
all error messages since last installation or Delete Database
and Backup Log, all activity to/from the device of the last 24
hours.
Backup database
Save all results (with response curves), all error messages,
all calibrations (not current) and controls since last
installation or Delete Database on USB.
Restore db no curves
Restore all results (without response curves) which were
saved on USB.
Restore database
Restore all results (with response curves) which were saved
on USB.
32
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Linux GUI
Restart database
The database server PostgreSQL runs as a service in the
background to store all measuring data. The icon
RESTART DATABASE restarts this database server.
This restart is the first step if the error message
“Database memory error.
No more patients can be stored [262]” occurs.
Delete database
Delete the entire database. The appropriate password
is required
Delete error db
Delete all error messages from the device.
The appropriate password is requiredStatistical evaluation
Log of startups
Display the log
(all since the last installation or “Delete Database”)
in “protocol”, which users logged into the system and when.
Log of hardware
Display the hardware actions
in protocol with user and timestamp.
Log of parameters
Display all changes of test parameters
in protocol with user and timestamp.
www.biolabo.fr 33
Service manual
Linux GUI
34
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
Maintenance program
This chapture describes all functions in the maintenance program.
The maintenance program is used to set the system settings and parameters of the analyzer.
Table of content
Starting the module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
System parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reagent preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Test selections.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Test parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Test ASTM.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Copy test from/ to USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Backup/ restore data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
www.biolabo.fr 35
Service manual
Maintenance program
Starting the module

Start the Maintenance from the service desktop. The module will load.
Enter MAINTENANCE on the Login screen, confirm with Password. The module will then load.
Menu description
1 2 3
4 5
The program consists of the main menu and the work area, where functions can be run and options can be chan-
ged.
ID Description
1. System parameter menu of the adjusting program with a list of all sub-programs.
2. Function menu of available functions for the menu item which is currently selected.
3. Work area. The work area changes according to each selected menu item. Each menu item has its
own information which will be displayed or various functions which can be selected.
4. Message box. Display area for information about functions being processed or for error messages. Error
messages are displayed in red.
5. Date / Time. Software version.
Navigation
The maintenance program is navigated completely by using standard keyboard functions. Each selected element in
the main menu is highlighted with a background colour.
Key functions
wy move to item
e select item
k change value, toggle predefined possibilities
0 to 9 insert value
A to Z insert text
^ main menu – quit and save
j r copy the volume table
36
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
System parameters
The menu item system parameter is used to set or change the system configuration of the analyzer.
Name/Address
(a1) System name
Possible settings: 20 letters
The system identification entered here is output with standard print (one patient per page) and with the printout of
the working list. In the routine (messages, conditions, service), this name is indicated on the display.
(a2) Name of labor

The name of the lab entered here is output with standard print (one patient per page) and with the printout of the
working list.
(a3) Address
The address entered here is output with standard print (one patient per page) and with the printout of the working
list.
(a4) Head of labor

The name entered here is output with standard print (one patient per page) and with the printout of the working
list.
www.biolabo.fr 37
Service manual
Maintenance program
Computer define
(b1) System language

Possible settings: several languages.
The system language (only for the Routine) is set with this function.
(b2) System date format

Possible settings: MMDDYY, DDMMYY and YYMMDD (DD = day, MM = month, YY = year).
The date type is set with this function.
(b3) System time format

Possible settings: Time 24 hours and time 12 (AM/PM).
The type of time display is set with this function.
(b4) Sound Hardware

Possible settings: Speaker, Soundcard, Soundcard +Speaker, TMC Sound (Integrated speaker in the instrument).
TMC sound recommended.
(b5) Number of alarms

Possible settings: 1, 2, 3, 5 times, never, forever.
The number of alarm repetitions when an error message occurs is set with this function.
System type
Possible settings:
Restricted user interface, Standard, Alternate calibration curve:
Restricted user interface:

(1) Login as routine or user: The system shall prevent to apply changes to calibration curves, calibration settings, test
settings, reagent settings and QC settings. The test parameters are not visible.
(2) Login as Labhead: The system displays the test parameters, but not modifiable. The Labhead can apply changes
to calibration settings, reagent settings and QC settings and have full access to calibration curves.
Standard:
(1) Login as routine or user: The system displays the test parameters, but not modifiable. The user have full access to
calibration curves.
(2) Login as Labhead: The test parameters are visible and changeable. The Labhead can apply changes to calibrati-
on settings, reagent settings and QC settings and have full access to calibration curves.
Alternate calibration curve:
not supported.
Barcode define
(c1) External scanner

Possible settings: yes/no
The option to use an external hand hold scanner is set here.
(c2) Reagent Lot No Check

Possible settings: yes/no
When this option is set to „yes“ the scanned reagent lot number on the bottle is checked compared the saved/ insert
number in the reagent database. if the lot number is equal, you get just an acustical feedback. Is the lot number is
diffrent you receive the message: me43 „Lot No xxxxxx not found“.
38
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
Controls
(d7) Control plasma in position

Possible settings:X1-X4, C1-C4
Here are set the numbers and position of the control positions.
X1-X4: 4 control positions in plasma block are activated
C1-C4: 4 control positions in the reagent block are activated.
X1-X4,C1-C4: all 8 control positions are activated.
(d8) Control causes flags

Possible settings: “Yes” and “No”.
By activation, the patient results are flagged when the quality control is not valid or not OK.
Reagent blocks
(e1) Number of reagent blocks

Possible settings: 1-9
The number of activated reagent blocks in the routine program is set here.
The user can switch the required reagent block. Each reagent block must be set after activation by the technical
staff. At the default setting all positions are empty.
(e2) Reagent mix-time (minutes)

Possible settings: 0 to 999.
The mixing time in minute increments is set with this function.

Default is 0 = continuous mixing. If “0” is set, then this option (e3) is disabled.
(e3) Reagent no mix-time (minutes)

The no mixing time in minute increments is set with this function.
(e4) Reagent cooling

The reagent cooling is set in this function.
(e5) Reagent with timer

Feature not used. Default setting: “No”
(e6) Beep for low level

The alarm beep for reagent low level is set with this function.
(e7) Level display

The schematic view of reagent level is set in this function. Set also the predetection.
www.biolabo.fr 39
Service manual
Maintenance program
(e8) Emersion depth automatic

Possible setting: Yes/No
Automatic liquid level control for the reagent block (Immersion Depth Automatic - IDA).
The corresponding reagent level is checked each time the reagent is pipetted. This is done to prevent
pipetting errors. After the reagent is refilled or replaced, it is automatically checked. This is done to
confirm that the new level is greater than the previous level.
You must be logged in as -Service- in order to display or make changes to the IDA system. IDA
is activated through the Routine or the Maintenance program. If IDA is set to -Yes- in the system
parameters, then it must also be activated in the reagent block. Each reagent position can display the
IDA level. IDA can be activated by selecting the corresponding reagent position (Space Bar).
The IDA system is limited by the settings made in the adjustment of the sampler positions (Adjustment
program).
- Z-depth adjustment for the reagent positions (refer to Adjusting)
- Detect Z-position in the reagent block (refer to Adjusting)
- Start IDA Z-position detection +200 steps
Host communication
(f1) Communication
Possible settings: “LAN”, “no communication”, “unidirectional” , “bidirectional”
The type of communication with the host is set in this function. . If “no communication” is set, all fields in the groups
(f ), (g) and (h) are disabled.
(f2) Validation
The possibility of patient result validation is set with this function.

If “No” is set, the measured values are transferred directly from the PC, after the last measuring result of a sample, to
the host without an inquiry.
If “Yes” is set, after inquiry the transfer of the measured values must be initiated manually (at results/ transmit new
with F5).
(f3) Result send type

Possible settings: “after each patient” and “after each patient/qcontr”
The transmitting of results in batches for patients and quality controls is set in this function.
▪▪ After each patient
The results are sent to the host upon completion of all tests for the corresponding patient.
▪▪ After each patient/qcontrl

The results are sent to the host upon completion of all tests for the
corresponding patient or after a Quality Control has been run.
(f5) Validate checksum

The reception of a checksum from host is set in this function.
40
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
(f6) Send probe only if all tests ok

The possibility to send patient results partially is set in this function.

▪▪ If “No” is set
After the first run of all tests for one patient, the tests results are transmitted to the host.
After the re-run, all other tests with results will be sent. Only tests without results will not be transmitted!
▪▪ If “Yes” is set
Results of a single patient are only sent when all tests are finished without an error.
If an error occurs with one test, no results of this patient will be sent.
ASTM configuration
(f10) ASTM type

Possible settings: extendent, standard
Different numbers of transmitted data fields. Default is standard
Is extendent activated the additional fields are send always as empty fields.
Reason: keep compatibiliy to other supplier.
(f11) ASTM station number

Possible settings: 0- 99
Number definds the instrument at the Host. Only usefull when more than one analyzer is used.
(f12) ASTM number of retries

Possible settings: 1-9
The number definds how many retiries of sesult sending are made in case of communication problems.
Host fields
(g1) Transmit errorflag(s)

Possible settings: “both”, “one” and “none”.
The possibility to send error flags is set in this function.
(g2) Transmit system ID

The transmission of the system ID entered in “Name of system” is set in this function.
If “Yes” is set, the system identification is transferred to the host when results are transmitted. This is for labs using
more than one instrument.
(g3) Transmit prep. number

The possibility to send sample rack position is set in this function.
(g4) Transmit block number

www.biolabo.fr 41
Service manual
Maintenance program
(g5) Transmit single/double

The possibility to re-mark the result, if it is measured double is set in this function.
(g6) Old record ID

(g7) Zero values only, if measured

The possibility of transferring “0” is set in this function. If “yes” is set, measured zero values will only be transferred if
they were actually measured. If no zero value was measured, then “-----” will be sent.
(g8) Test request: transmit system ID

The possibility to request tests with the system ID, entered in “Name of system” is set in this function.
If “Yes” is set, the system identification is transferred to the host when tests are requested. This is for labs using more
than one instrument.
(g9) Test request: receive system ID

The reception of the system ID during request, entered in “Name of system”, is set in this function.
If “Yes” is set, the system identification is transferred to the host when tests are transmitted. This is for labs using
more than one instrument.
(g10) Test request: receive emergency

The possibility to receive emergency status from the host is set in this function. If “Yes” is set, the host transfers the
mark for emergency status to the instrument.
Interface host
(h1) Host device

Possible settings: “auto” (only detects USB interfaces), “dev/ttyUSB0”, “dev/ttyUSB1”, “dev/ttyS0” and “dev/ttyS1”.
Auto, USB0 and USB1 only work with the USB interface. The selection of the host interface is set in this function.
(h2) Baudrate
Possible settings: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
The baud rate is set in this function.
42
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
(h3) Parity
Possible settings: “ODD”, “EVEN”, “NONE”,
“ODD” or “EVEN” should be selected for safety reasons.

The parity check is set in this function.
(h4) Char size

Possible settings: 7 and 8.
Should 7 bit be selected, not all character sets in the PC are transferred to the host. The character size is set in this
function.
(h5) Stop bit(s)

Possible settings: 1 and 2.
The stop bits are set in this function.
Printer
(i1) System with printer

The possibility to use a printer is set in this function.
(i2) Page size

Possible settings:
▪▪ A4 (210mm x 297mm)
▪▪ A5 (148mm x 210mm)
▪▪ A6 (105mm x 148mm)
▪▪ Executive (191mm x 254mm, 10inch)
▪▪ Letter (216mm x 279mm, 11inch)
▪▪ Rollpaper (80 chars/line)
The paper format is set in this function.
(i3) Form feed after routine

The paper forward feed is set in this function. (only continuous paper).
Using a laser printer:
If “Yes” is set, one run is finished, and the last page is not completely full; the incomplete page is still printed. If “No” is
set, the last, incomplete page is not printed. The results are printed in the next run, when the page is completely full.
(i4) Patient print format

Possible settings: “standard print”, “one patient per page” and “short standard”.
The possibility of predefined “Patient print format” is set in this function.
www.biolabo.fr 43
Service manual
Maintenance program
(i5) Normal Range

The possibility to print results with normal range, entered in test parameter d3 and d4, is set in this function.
(i6) Protocol printing

The possibility to print results by racks is set in this function.
(i7) Standard printing in routine

If “Yes” is set, the printout starts after all tests for a patient are completed and “Form feed after routine” (i3) is set to
“YES”, or when one page is completely full. The possibility to print test results, sorted by patient samples during
routine, is set in this function.
(i8) Standard printing after routine

If “Yes” is set, the data will print out after the instrument has completed the routine.
The possibility to print test results, sorted by patient samples, after routine, is set in this function.
Pipetting
(j2) Kind of control

Possible settings: as patient routine and always double.
The test type for QC relating to routine tests is set in this function.
(j3) System with one plasma

The possibility to make series of measurements is set in this function. The system always takes the plasma from the
rack position 21.
Rack return
(l1) Return unused cuvettes

The return of a cuvette bar with unused cuvettes is set in this function.
(l2) Return unused cuvettes STAT

The possibility to switch off the cuvette bar return is set in this function. If the number of emergency tests to be
measured is greater than the number of registered, the rack return is switched off.
44
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
(l3) Routine unused cuv. routine

The possibility to switch off the cuvette bar return is set in this function. If the number of routine tests to be measu-
red is greater than the number of registered, the rack return is switched off.
Sensors
(n1) Sensor ball in cuvette

Possible settings: Yes and No.
The sensor for the ball counter is set in this function.
(n2) Sensor photometer meas. pos.

The sensor for photometer is set in this function.This sensor checks the positioning of the photometer before
measuring to assure that it has completely achieved its vertical measuring position.
(n3) Sensor photometer incu. pos.

The sensor for the photometer is set in this function. This sensor checks the positioning of the photometer to assure
that the photometerhas completely achieved its horizontal entry position before the rack is driven into the photo-
meter.
(n4) Sensor measuring mix speed

The sensor for measuring mix-speed is set in this function. This sensor controls, during the entire measurement
procedure, the mixing motor to assure that the desired revolution speed is maintained.
(n5) Minimum measuring mix speed

The sensor for measuring mix-speed is set in this function. This value sets the minimum desired speed for the mixing
motor in the photometer before an error message appears. This value can only be entered when “Sensor measuring
mix-speed” is set to “Yes”.
A minimum speed of 350 rpm is recommended.
www.biolabo.fr 45
Service manual
Maintenance program
Reagent preparation
The menu is used to set up /define the reagent block positions.
In case more than one reagentblock is in System parameter > number of reagentblock is activated, you can select
the the block which is to be set up. By pressing e the working are shows the existing settings of the selected
reagent block.
The cursor is now in the first reagent position.
Description of the reagent block:
The reagent block consists of 16 positions plus one position for “Clean”.
The “Clean position” is a preset position in the reagent block where the Clean Solution (a
decontamination solution for the needle) goes.
Positions 1 to 11 are for bottles and reagent containers with a maximum diameter of 30 mm (exception
is position 5 which is max 34 mm). Position 7 is a preset position for buffer. Positions 12 to 16 are for
bottles and reagent containers with a maximum diameter of 12 mm.
46
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
Description of a reagent position
1 2 6
ID Description
Reagent abbreviation
3
Test short cut 7
Reagent name
4
Liquid level display
5
IDA setting 8
Reagent position
Reagent abbreviation
Possible settings:
RE - reagent
BU - buffer
DP - dilution plasma
CC- calcium chloride
NP - normal plasma
BL - bleach
LA - latex reagent
AC - activator
SU - substrate
Test short-cut
Definable/can be changed. It is recommended to use the abbreviation for the test being run.
Reagent name
definable/can be changed
Possible letters: 20
Liquid level display

The display can be activated and deactivated in the Maintenance program under System Parameter
(e7). The colour displayed changes according to the liquid level detected.
Black / Blue = Level is OK
Red / Blue = The level is at its minimum (change or refill the reagent)
Red / Grey = No liquid detected
If the cursor is at a certain reagent position in the reagent block, then the display can be reset with the
F6 key. This means that a new value will be calculated the next time the reagent is pipetted.
Use the key combination of SHIFT + F6 to reset the entire reagent block.
IDA
- for this test position „ IDA“ switched on and off.
Mixed
- Preset stirring positions: positions 1, 3 and 5.
Timer
- Hours and minutes for durability of reagent. This is only displayed if item (e5) has been set
to “YES” in “System Parameter”. The maximum value for the timer is 240 hours. The timer
runs backwards. At 0, an acoustic and optical massage occurs.
www.biolabo.fr 47
Service manual
Maintenance program
Test selections
Selection of all tests which will be run in the routine.
Select the test; pressing the k will unmark the corresponding test. Although there are 40 tests which can be
defined, do not activate more than 19, because in the routine program not more can be represented. The selected
tests are then marked.
48
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
Test parameter
Names
(a1) Test name

The full name of the test entered here is output on the first line of the printout.
(a2) Test abbreviation

Possible settings: 7 characters.
The abbreviated test name is entered here. The test name appears in the “routine” window - in the “test” menu.
(a3) Test manufacturer

The name of the reagent manufacturer can be entered here.
(a4) Test version

The version of the test parameter is shown here.
(a5) Test protected

This option shows the protection status of the test parameter. No switching possible.
A protected test it is only possible to change following options at the testparameter:
www.biolabo.fr 49
Service manual
Maintenance program
Times
(b1) Incubation sec

Possible settings: 40 to 999
It is advisable to program incubation times for routine tests in a uniform way. This is done, because tests with the
same incubation time and same pipetting sequence can be combined in one cuvette bar.
(b2) Start sec

Possible settings: 0 to 999. Chromogenic test: 0
Clotting tests: The minimum starting time is 5 seconds. Starting time determines the moment when the measuring
signal is actively registered. The coagulation process and timer start after the photometer tips. The shortest expec-
ted measuring time should be programmed.
(b3) Measuring 1 sec

▪▪ Chromogenic test
Possible settings: 5 to 60. Starting of the chromogenic measurement with digital zero-balance
▪▪ Coagulation testPossible settings: 20 to 999.

The maximum measuring time for the first test determination.
The measuring time determines the maximum time between tipping of the photometer and ejection of the cuvette
bar. Ejection of the cuvette bar occurs no matter if measuring was successful or not - after the maximum measuring
time has been reached. If all measurements in one rack have finished before the defined end measuring time, the
rack is ejected immediately and the results are registered.
(b4) Measuring 2 sec

Possible settings: 10 to 999. End of chromogenic measurement with registration of the last value.
▪▪ Coagulation test
Possible settings: 20 to 999. The maximum measuring time of a repetition. The
“Measuring 2 sec” must be > “Measuring 1 sec” or 0 seconds.
The measuring time determines the maximum time between tipping of the photometer and ejection of cuvette bar.
Ejection of the cuvette bar occurs no matter if measuring was successful or not - after the maximum measuring time
has been reached. If all measurements in one rack have finished before the defined end measuring time, the rack is
ejected immediately and the results are registered.
(b5) Single minimum

Possible settings: defined “Start time” to defined “Measuring 1 sec”.
The possibility of test repetitions is set in this function. All measuring values within the range Single minimum to
Single maximum get no rerun. All values outside this range get a flag and will be measured again.
(b6) Single maximum

Possible settings: defined “Single minimum” to defined “Measuring 1 sec”.
The possibility of test repetitions is set in this function. All measuring values within the range Single minimum to
Single maximum get no rerun. All values outside this range get a flag and will be measured again.
50
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
(b7) Pipetting time

Possible settings: 0 to 999. The pipetting time regulates the pipetting time of consecutive racks. Entering pipet-
ting time is important in case not all cuvettes in a rack need to be pipetted, or if a subsequent test has a different
measuring time (long). The pipetting time is the time from the first pipetting step in the first cuvette to the time
the completely pipetted rack leaves the pipetting position. It can be beneficial to know the pipetting time for time
management optimisation.
(b8) Pipetting sequence

Possible settings: “normal”, “extra” and “special”.
▪▪ Normal
for tests with a non-critical incubation time. A rack is pipetted without a specific waiting time.
▪▪ Extra
is a specially designed pipetting sequence additional to the specific waiting time. If several tests have to be
combined within a rack, the test with pipetting sequence “extra” will be placed in the last cuvettes of a rack.
▪▪ Special
for sensitive tests like Prot. S, Factor 8 with specific waiting times to stabilise
the incubation time, even if only 1 cuvette will be pipetted.
Testparameter
(d1) Double
Possible settings: “Yes and No”.
If “Yes” is set, the test will always run as double determination

Attention: If “No” is set, always enter the tolerance (d2) in %. This is due to the fact that possible repetitions will
always be measured “double” like calibrator.
(d2) Tolerance %
It is a “+/-” value of entered percent referring to the original measuring value as:
Coagulation tests: the measured value in seconds.
Chromogenic tests: the delta absorbance measuring value.
(d3) Normal minimum

The possibility to enter a normal minimum value is set in this function.

All results below this value are marked with an error flag. No automatic repetition.
(d4) Normal maximum

The possibility to enter a normal maximum value is set in this function.

All results above this value are marked with an error flag. No automatic repetition. The “Normal maximum” must be
> “Normal minimum”.
www.biolabo.fr 51
Service manual
Maintenance program
(d5) Following test

Possible settings: short cut (test code) of the corresponding test (only activated tests).
The follow up test is an option to activate another test automatically. This is done in case the measured value is
below or above the entered “Normal minimum / maximum” range or if no coagulation occurred. All results outside
the normal range and EF23 (no clot) activate this test repetition.
(d6) Derived test

Possible settings: short cut (test code) of the corresponding test (only activated tests)
Derived test PT / Fibrinogen is one test which gives two results: PT and Fibrinogen. The Fibrinogen result is calcula-
ted by the delta A of the PT reaction. To run these tests together, they must be combined.
(d7) Dilution when repeat

The possibility to repeat tests with another dilution is set in this function. This is currently only necessary for fibrino-
gen tests.
If, for some reason, no coagulation is detected, the measurement is repeated at 1 with the identical dilution. At 2,
the double sample volume is repeated, and then the result is halved. At 3, the triple sample volume etc... Maximum
dilution repetition is 10.
(d8) Factor
Possible settings: 1.000 to 9999.000.
The possibility to multiplying the final result with a factor is set in this function. Only the first final result is multiplied
with the factor. In case one test has two final measuring results, % out of the curve and INR from the ISI value of the
normal range, only the % value is altered. The INR remains unchanged.
(d9) Detection
Possible settings: pos/neg, positive, negative, C-lin405, C-pol405, C-lin620, C-pol620, der/neg, derived, A-pol 620,
pn/check, A-pol405, Cpol405, pos/neg405 and positive405.
The method of the optical measurement is set in this function.

The supplier defines which test adaptation should be used. An incorrect selection can lead to erroneous results.
Certain types of detection are not available in all test applications. The settings should be individually selected only
after consulting the system advisor.
The detection types are

C-lin405, C-pol405, A-pol405, C-lin620, C-pol620, A-pol620
C = chromogenic (or immunological measurement).
lin = for connecting the individual measuring points within the reaction by means of linear regression.
pol = as in “lin” but with polynom.
405/620 = nm, is the wavelength
Special features of detection type “A-pol”:

the A stands for a special reaction process for lightening (for example special D-Dimer ests).
mixing is constant with this type of detection.
the ball sensor in the incubation is always active with this type of detection - even when it
switched off under “Maintenance”/“system param“/”Sensors”/(n1) Sensor ball in cuvette.
52
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
▪▪ Coagulation test
pos/neg, positive, negative, pn/check, pos/neg405, positive405
positive = for the positive threshold (reaction on lightening).
Negative = for the negative threshold (reaction on turbidity).
pos/neg = both thresholds mentioned above.
405 = nm, wavelength recommended for coagulation tests.
pn/check = as pos/neg, but with monitoring of the measuring signal according to “standard values“.
This option is only possible when combined with (e1) Sensitivity normal
Coagulation tests with additional calculation of a further reaction (for example derived fibrinogen)
der/neg, derived
der/neg = for the active test which is also pipetted
derived = is applied to the test which calculates the reaction from the der/neg test.
(e1) Sensitivity
Possible settings: “normal” and “trace”.
If “trace” is set, the results are additionally checked for their plausibility. The instrument checks whether the measu-
rement signal remains within 2 seconds outside the thresholds, and nearly reaches the zero line. After 20 seconds
is only checked whether the measuring signal 2 sec is outside the thresholds. The measurement is marked with flag
EF27 and automatically repeated with the sensitivity setting “normal“ in double determination. The setting does not
actually affect the sensitivity of the measuring results. “Trace” simply increases the exactness of the measurement
detection. “trace” is recommended for single determination of the following tests: Quick, Hepato-Quick; PTT and fac-
tors. If “normal” is set, the measuring results are accepted. Selection “normal” is generally recommended for double
determination and single determinations except the trace recommendations.
(e2) Max. tests in cuv. rack

Possible settings: 0, 2 and 4.
The number of tests to be run in one cuvette bar is set in this function. This can be done for critical tests to, for ex-
ample, reduce the risk of temperature variations.
0 = all cvettes per rack are used for this test.
2 = 2 cuvettes per rack are used for this test.
4 = 4 cuvettes per rack are used for this test.
www.biolabo.fr 53
Service manual
Maintenance program
Calculation
(g1) First value: type

Possible settings: “Sec”, “Curve”, “NorISI”, “RatNor”, “CruISI”, “Rat1:2”, secMod and s-modF
The type of calculation is set in this function.

▪▪ Sec: Results are only displayed in seconds.
▪▪ Sec Mod: This feature is a modification function which adds 2.5 sec. to each measured
result.For example: measured result 15sec. + 2.5 sec. =corrected result 17.5 sec.
▪▪ Curve: A chart can be entered from which a curve is then created.
▪▪ NOR ISI: Only the normal time and the ISI value can be entered.
▪▪ RatNor: Only the normal time is available.
▪▪ CurISI: See “Curve” with additional INR value.
▪▪ Rat 1:2 Calculate a ratio on APC resistance test.
(g2) First value: unit

Possible settings: all required units can be freely defined with the keyboard.
The unit in which tests are measured is set in this function.
(g3) First value: format

Possible settings: 9.999 to 9999.
The decimal places are set in this function.
(g4) Second value: type

Possible settings: “Sec”, “Curve”, “NorISI”, “RatNor”, “CurISI”, “Rat1:2” and “secMod”.
The possibility to calculate with a second type of calculation is set in this function. It’s only possible if the curve has
been selected for the first value type. E.g.: PT in % (Calc.2) + INR
(g5) Second value unit

See (g2) First value: unit
(g6) Second value format

See (g3) First value: format
Calibration
(k1) Interpolation
Possible settings: “Spline”, “Reg.Linear”, “Pnt-to-Pnt” and “Polynom”.
The mathematic procedures for interpolation of calibration curve points are set in this function.
Spline
Reg.Linear = Linear regression
Pnt-to-Pnt = point to point
Polynom = Third degree polynomials
The required settings for the tests are recommended by the supplier and should not be changed as such.
54
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
(k3) Depending test

Possible settings: short cut (test code) of the corresponding test.
The possibility to enter the tests which all use the same calibration curve is set in this function. Changing the calibra-
tion for this test will also automatically change the calibration for the other entered tests.
(k4) Graphic scale

Possible settings: “Lin/Lin”, “Lin/Log”, “Log/Lin” and “Log/Log”.
The axes division for calibration curves are set in this function. The appropriate representation is relevant to the dis-
play and printout of calibration curves. Axes representation is also recommended by the supplier. Alterations have
no influence as regards to the results.
Volume single
All numeric indications are in µl (micro litres), except in the “Incub (m8)” column. All volumes are drawn up with air
bubbles in order to separate them from the water column in the tube / probe system. The probe is automatically
cleaned with a “cleaning solution” from the inside and outside before drawing up other solutions. The entire liquid-
volume in a single cuvette should lie between 150µl and 260µl.
(m1) Liquid
Possible settings: “PL”, “RE”, “BU”, “DP”, “CC”, “SU”, “AC”, “BL”, “LA”, “NP” and empty
All liquids to be pipetted, including plasma, have predefined codes.

▪▪ PL = Plasma
▪▪ RE = Reagent
▪▪ BU = Buffer
▪▪ DP = Deficient plasma
▪▪ CC = Calcium chloride
▪▪ SU = Substrate
▪▪ AC = Activator
▪▪ BL = Bleach
▪▪ LA = Latex reagent
▪▪ NP = Normal plasma
▪▪ Empty = No selection
(m2) Test
Possible settings: “short cut” (test code) of the corresponding test.
All reagents, activators, etc., except the plasma, must be indicated by the test short-cut. It is possible to use the
reagent and the relevant short-cut for differing tests when the same reagent has been used. This is valid, e.g., for
“Buffer“, which is used for several tests.
(m3) Cuvette position

Possible settings: “H”, “L”, “P” and “W”.
The hole which should be pipetted is set in this function.

▪▪ H = High position in the cuvette
▪▪ L = Low position in the cuvette
▪▪ P = Predilution position in special predilution bars
▪▪ W = Reagent position that is to be used for additional probe cleaning.
www.biolabo.fr 55
Service manual
Maintenance program
(m4) Up
This is for the volume drawn up by the probe. This volume must be more than the volume to be ejected (m5) Down.
The remaining volume prevents the reagent from becoming over-diluted.
(m5) Down
This setting is for the volume pipetted into the cuvette. This volume is less than the “Up volume”(m4)
(m6) Wash
Possible settings: empty, 1 to 5 and 1C to 5C.
Between pipetting different liquids, the system must wash the probe inside and out: This wash cycle can be set up
to 10 different levels. 5 levels just with wash water and another 5 (C) with wash water and a cleaning solution.
Level 1 = small wash volume
Level 5 = high wash volume
Level 1C = small wash volume with a cleaning solution
Level 5C = high wash volume with a cleaning solution
(m7) Dil. speed

Possible settings: “empty”, “norm”, “fast” and “seri”.
The type of pipetting speed is set in this function. For all pipetting steps with normal volumes, “Dil. Speed” must be
set to “Normal”. “Fast” is only allowed when very small volumes (less than 10 µl) are pipetted into the cuvette.
Special feature: When “AC” is entered under “Reagent“ and “Fast“ under “Dil. Speed” are combined, additional mixing
of the pipetted liquid by the probe in the cuvette takes place.
Pipetting in serial is only allowed upon request.
(m8) Incub.
An additional incubation time to be used for the pre-reaction is set in this function. If a pipetting sequence has been
completed, and if it needs additional incubation before pipetting the next reagent, the initial cuvette bar will remain
in the incubation station. The program waits for the duration of the entered incubation time before pipetting conti-
nues.
Volume double
Possible settings: like “Volume single”
You can use j/ r to copy the chart for double determination testing once all the volumes for single determination
testing have been entered. You should still control the values once they have been copied.
56
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
Test ASTM
This item is used to mapping the test numbers for the ASTM LIS. It is only need to set up, when an ASTM protocol is
used.
The tab shows all activated test of the analyzer.

In the column “Test No” you can assign 3 different test numbers (numeric) for the 3 possible values of a test. (“raw”,
“first” and “second” value)
In the column “Unit” you can add the corresponded unit for the values. (alpha-numeric)
Set “0” to all not used lines.
The mapping of the analyzer test numbers to ASTM test numbers must be always adapted to the actual configurati-
on of the LIS system.
www.biolabo.fr 57
Service manual
Maintenance program
Copy test from/ to USB memory

To copy tests to/from USB memory use the menu items:
▪▪ Test from USB stick

▪▪ Tests to USB stick
▪▪ All tests to USB stick
Copy test from USB stick

This function allows you to save individual tests to the hard disk drive. The test abbreviation can be changed when
the tests are saved to the HDD.
Example: You have a test on the disk with the test code A. When you save it to the HDD, you could change this to D.
Copy test to USB stick

This is the exact opposite of the previous function. You read from the HDD and save to the USB stick.
All test to USB stick

This is the exact opposite of the previous function. You read from the HDD and save all tests to the USB stick.
58
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Maintenance program
Backup/ restore data

To backup or restore the different data you can use the items:
▪▪ Backup Parameters
▪▪ Restore Parameters
▪▪ Backup Database
▪▪ Backup log
Backup Parameters
All system-relevant settings and test parameters will be saved on a USB stick.
When selecting this function, the following items are saved:
▪▪ Sampler positions
▪▪ Test settings incl. the actual calibration curve
▪▪ System parameter (all settings the item SYSTEM PARAMETERS )
Notice:
Make sure to always have a current backup of your parameters!
The message “Success” appears upon completion.
Restore Parameters
This function is used to restore the system parameters from a USBstick where a former parameter backup is stored.
When selecting this function, the following items are saved:
▪▪ System parameter
Notice:
To restore the sampler position, use the item READ POSITIONS FROM USB STICK at the Adjusting program.
Backup Database
This function is used to make a database backup.
When selecting this function, the following data are saved:
▪▪ All patient results from the HDD
▪▪ All Control results without reaction curves from the HDD
▪▪ All error messages from the HDD
Backup log
This feature is used for diagnostic and troubleshooting reasons.
When this function is select, following datas are stored on a USBstick, if plugged in:
▪▪ Sampler positions
▪▪ All internal software protocols from the last 24 hours.
www.biolabo.fr 59
Service manual
Maintenance program
Exit
This function is to leave the program. The login screen or the service desktop appears.
60
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Adjusting
This chapter describes the funtions of all menus in the program “adjusting”
All hardware adjustments are controlled and set by this program.
For detailed operation description of each adjustment procedure, see chapter Operations
Table of content
Starting the module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Sampler positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Test position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Wash position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cuvette positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Reagent positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Clean position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Buffer positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Predilution positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Plasma positions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Manual clean position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Offset adjusting all positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Load default position.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sampler Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Optics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Liquid System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
EPROMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Comterm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
www.biolabo.fr 61
Service manual
Adjusting
Starting the module

Start via the service desktop: Left-click on the Adjusting symbol at the service desktop. The module will then load.
Start via login screen: Enter an „a“ in the upper field of the Login screen. the word „adjusting“ is completed in grey.
press e The cursor switch to the lower field.
Enter the Password. Press e The module will then load.
1 2 3
4
5
Menu description
The program consists of the main menu and the work area, where functions can be run and options can be chan-
ged.
ID Description
1 Main Adjusting menu of the adjusting program with a list of all sub-programs.
2 Function menu of available functions for the menu item which is currently selected.
3 Work area. The work area changes according to each selected menu item. Each menu item has its
own information which will be displayed or various functions which can be selected.
4 Message box. Display area for information about functions being processed or
for error messages. Error messages are displayed in red.
5 Date / Time. Software version.
Navigation
The adjusting program is navigated completely by using standard keyboard functions. Each selected element in the
main menu is highlighted with a background colour.
Key functions
e select item / save
^ main menu - exit
zxwy move to item / move axes from the sampler
zxwy and b the selected axis will move 10 steps in the corresponding direction.
{ move axes from sampler
} move axes from sampler
62
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Sampler positions
This menu item is for checking and setting all possible sampler positions.
Home position
The Home Position is the base position of the sampler axis.
▪▪ X axis home: left
▪▪ Y axis home: back
▪▪ Z axis home: up
The opto coupler are switched in this position.the encoder are set to zero. All positions are calculated from the home
position.
Test position
The needle is adjusted so it is about 1mm above the red test point on the cuvette rack transport unit
By setting reference position, the washposition and the detect z is set as well by calculation.
Wash position
Position
This is adjusted so the needle is exactly centred in the wash position. The Z-axis wash setting is 200 steps higher
than the needle test position.
Detect Z
Place a piece of paper on the wash station and adjust the needle height so that the needle just barely touches the
paper.
www.biolabo.fr 63
Service manual
Adjusting
Cuvette positions
The sampler positioning for the cuvettes are set here. You can change the setting by using the navigation keys (refer
to “Key functions Adjusting”).
All positions (depending on REF)

Activate all positions (depending on REF). A cuvette bar will move automatically to the pipetting position. During
this process, you have no access to the sub menu. The needle moves to the middle of the cuvette frame (1). Adjust
the needle so it is centred. Adjust the Z-axis so it barely touches the frame and the liquid sensor LED turns on.
After doing this, select the option: “TEST CUVETTE POSITIONS”. The needle moves to all possible cuvette positions. It starts
at cuvette 1 low position. It continues with the high positions and at the end with the secondary cups.
In case adjustments need to be made, the individual posi-

tions can be adjusted via
▪▪ SINGLE POSITION LOW

▪▪ SINGLE POSITION HIGH 1
Test cuvette position

The needle moves to all possible cuvette positions. It starts at cuvette 1 low position. It continues with the high
positions and at the end the secondary cups.
Single position low

By selecting this option, the cursor moves to a field where you can select each cuvette by entering the correspon-
ding number. By pressing e, the needle moves to the selected cuvette. Now, the position of the X and Y axes can be
changed.
Single position high

By selecting this option, the cursor moves to a field where you can select each cuvette by entering the correspon-
ding number. By pressing e, the needle moves to the selected cuvette. Now, the position of the X and Y axes can
be changed.
Reagent positions
The sampler positioning for the reagent area is set here. You can change the setting by using the navigation keys
(refer to “Key functions Adjusting”).
All position (dep. on REF)
Single position
Each sampler position at the reagent area can be individually set/readjusted with regards to the X, Y and Z axes.
The cursor moves to a field “Position” where you can select each position by entering the corresponding number.
Confirm with e. The sampler moves to the desired position. You can change the setting by using the navigation
keys (ref “Key functions Adjusting”).
Detect Z all
The Z-levels in the whole reagent area where the liquid sensing is activated, are set here. By selecting this option,
the needle moves to the set level of the first position. You can change the setting by using the navigation keys (refer
to “Key functions Adjusting”).
64
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Detect Z single
The Z-levels in a single reagent position where the liquid sensing is activated, can be set here. By selecting this
option and entering a single position, the needle moves to the set level of the select position. You can change the
setting by using the navigation keys (refer to “Key functions Adjusting”).
Clean position
The sampler position for the clean is set here. Refer to the chapture „operations“ for setting instructions.
Buffer positions
The buffer position is used only during a calbration. the used buffer is inserded here. This item is used to set the right
Sampler position for this buffer position. Refer to the chapture „operations“ for setting instructions.
Predilution positions
The predilution position is used to dilute plasma before it is dispensed in the cuvette. (only used for test requiring
high dilution plasma ratio).

The sampler position for the X, Y and Z axes is set for all 40 positions at the predilution area. The needle moves to the
reference point. You can change the position by using the navigation keys (ref “Key functions Adjusting”).
By pressing e the new position is saved. All positions of the dilution cups (Position and detect z level)
are calculated from this position.
Single position
Each sampler position at the dilution area can be individually set/readjusted with regards to the X, Y and Z axes. The
cursor moves to a field “Position” where you can select each position (1-40) by entering the corresponding number.
Confirm with e. You can change the setting by using the navigation keys (refer “Key functions Adjusting”).
Adjust dilution position 1..40

By selecting this option, all dilution positions are calculated by the set position 1 and 40. You will be asked if you
want start the adjusting. The cursor field is as default on “Yes”. With the spacebar you can toggle to “No”. Confirm
with e to start the recalculation.
Detect z all (depending on first)

The Z level at the dilution area where the liquid sensing is activated, can be set here. By selecting this option, the
needle moves to the set level at the first left chamber of the left predilution rack. You can change the setting by
using the navigation keys (ref “Key functions Adjusting”).
Detect z single
Each individual Z level at the dilution area where the liquid sensing is activated, can be set here. The cursor moves
to a field “Position” where you can select each position (1-40) by entering the corresponding number. Confirm with
e. You can change the setting by using the navigation keys (ref “Key functions Adjusting”).
Plasma positions
The sampler positioning for the plasma area is set here. You can change the setting by using the navigation keys
(refer to “Key functions Adjusting”).
www.biolabo.fr 65
Service manual
Adjusting

The sampler positioning for the X, Y and Z axes is set for all 36 positions at the sample pipetting area.
The Z position is set as default. The needle moves to pos 1 of the pipetting area.
The needle must be in the centre and barely touch the rubber surface of the primary tubes being used. You can
change the setting by using the navigation keys (ref “Key functions Adjusting”).
Single position
Each sampler position at the Plasma positions can be individually set/readjusted. The cursor moves to a field “Posi-
tion” where you can select each position (1-36) by entering the corresponding number. Confirm with e. You can
change the setting by using the navigation keys (ref “Key functions Adjusting”).
Adjust plasma pos 1..36

By selecting this option, all plasma positions are calculated by the set position 1 and 36 (X4). You will be asked if you
want start the adjusting. The cursor field is as default on “Yes”. With the spacebar you can toggle to “No”. Confirm
with e to start the recalculation.
Detect Z all (depending on REF)

The Z level at the plasma positions, where liquid sensing is activated The needle moves to pos 1 of the plasma posi-
tion and moves down to the set depth. You can change the setting by using the navigation keys (ref “Key functions
Adjusting)”.
Manual clean position

This item is to set the needle position for the manual clean position in the „routine program“.
The default position is set in the second slot of the reagent area, close to the user.
To avoid damages on the reagent cover, remove before select this item.
Offset adjusting all positions

This item is used to change all sapler position in relating to the reference position.
The sampler moves to the reference position. by changing the position at this menu all other positions will be chan-
ged for the same value and direction.
Load default position

If this item is activated, the default settings for the needle positions are loaded. The previous, custom adjustments
are replaced by loading the default values! The defaults are used to reset the needle position so that the needle
cannot be damaged when making adjustments.
66
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Sampler Management
This menu item is to store&copy the individual sampler positions for the analyzer from or to a separate USB stick.
Change sepeately the SN in the files, or view all the single values for the x,y, z axis for each sampler adjustment
positions.
Write positions to USB stick

The individual needle positions for the analyzer are saved on a separate USB stick.
Read positions from USB stick

The needle positions are loaded from the seperate USB stick to the computer.
Show sampler positions

All adjusted positions are displayed in the work area. The values displayed for the X, Y and Z-axes are based on the
home position.
Change serial number

Insert the serial number of the analyzer and exit with ^.
www.biolabo.fr 67
Service manual
Adjusting
Motors
This menu item is for checking and controlling the entire cuvette transport system from the reserve register to the
waste container. Three test programs are available to assure the cuvette transport is functioning properly.
wait
Transport a cuvette bar from the stack to the wait position. Sensors check the cuvette bar position.
pipet
Transport the cuvette bar from the wait position to the pipetting position. Sensors check the cuvette bar position
when the motor signals it is open again.
measb
When this item is activated, the cuvette bar is transported from the pipetting position into the measuring block. An
overload current is created once the rack hits the pin on the lifting magnet. The overload current signal the software
that the cuvette bar is in the correct position.
waste
The following steps are carried out when this item is activated:
▪▪ The measuring unit tips to its measuring position.
▪▪ The measuring unit motor moves the rack backwards for 0.5 seconds in
order to alleviate pressure on the lifting magnet’s pin.
▪▪ The lifting magnet switches and allows for ejection of the cuvette bar.
▪▪ The measuring unit motor transports the rack out of the measuring channel and into the waste container.
▪▪ The measuring unit moves back to the incubation entry position and the lifting
magnet switches off (goes back to the “blocking” position).
wait <== stift

When this item WAIT<== STIFT is activated, the rack is transported from the measuring position back to the wait positi-
on. All motors start together (backwards).
68
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Cuvette rack out

When the item CUVETTE RACK OUT is activated, the transport system ejects all cuvette bars in the transport system and
the measuring block to the waste container.
Check magnet
The lifting magnet in the measuring block is switched on and off in order to check the functionality and assembly.
Running permanently
Notice: check visually that no cuvette bar is in the cuvette rack transport before execute this feature.
This is a test program for the cuvette bar transportation. The following messages appears in the work area:
▪▪ Counted running: How often the rack has been transported.
▪▪ Counted balls: How many balls in the cuvette have been counted during the entire sequence.
▪▪ Counted 2nd try: During the running permanently procedure, a cuvette bar is blocked one
time and restarted after this error. Counted 2nd try shows how many restarts were used
Running permanently waste

Notice: check visually that no cuvette bar is in the cuvette rack transport before execute this feature.
Test program for the cuvette bar transportation. After this item is started, a cuvette bar constantly moves back and
forth between the left wait position and the measuring unit position and ejects the cuvette bar after the entered
amount in “STRIPS FROM STACK”. Running 5 cuvette bars is recommended. After completion, the cuvette bar is transpor-
ted to the waste container, and a new rack is taken from the cuvette register.
The following messages appears in the work area:
▪▪ Counted running: How often the rack has been transported.
▪▪ Counted balls: How many balls in the cuvette have been counted during the entire sequence.
▪▪ Counted 2nd try: During the running permanently procedure, a cuvette bar is blocked one time
and restarted after this error. Counted 2nd try shows how many restarts were used.
www.biolabo.fr 69
Service manual
Adjusting
Running permanently with sampler

Attention! The following criteria must be fulfilled before this test is started:
▪▪ Correctly adjusted sampler positions.

▪▪ no cuvette bar in the cuvette rack transport.
▪▪ Filled cuvette register.
▪▪ Filled water container.
A hitachi cup with circa 500μl NaCl in the following positions:

▪▪ Sample position 1.
▪▪ Acontainer on position 1 at reagent block with 1ml NaCl.
▪▪ This test checks the following modules:
▪▪ Cuvette rack transport unit
▪▪ Mesuring unit.
▪▪ Sampler positions at the sample, dilution and reagent area.
▪▪ The Liquid sensor
▪▪ Pump module for the washing station.
The work area displays each step of the procedure as it runs through the sequence (Transport system, measuring
unit, samopler and liquid sensors).
70
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Optics
By selecting the menu item optics, it is possible to check the measuring system
LED range 405

Attention: Do the following steps before activating this item!
▪▪ Clean the measuring unit.

▪▪ Remove the cuvette bar from the measuring unit.
▪▪ The light path in the measuring channel must be free of obstruction.
▪▪ When this item is activated, the measuring channels self-adjust.
▪▪ The supply current for the 405nm measuring channel LEDs is adjusted.
▪▪ During the adjustment, the bias from all channels is displayed.
▪▪ The measuring range is 3 - 80 on this reference.
▪▪ The Ref. is fixed at 29.
▪▪ All channels must be in the range.
Confirming with e will always save the currently displayed values. The values are saved in the thr-par.txt file loca-
ted in the “behnk\param” folder.
LED range 620

Please refer to the procedure for LED range 405 nm. If one channel is at 70 or higher, the TDF8 PCB needs to be
changed.
Optic stability test

This has the same function as MEASURING LONG. The measuring unit, however, tips ten times within 60 seconds. After
the self-adjustment, no measuring channel errors or problems should be displayed.
www.biolabo.fr 71
Service manual
Adjusting
Measuring long
▪▪ The test runs for 60 seconds after it is activated.
▪▪ After a five second self-adjustment of the measuring
system, the values scroll on the monitor.
▪▪ The displayed values should be 0
▪▪ Cross-talking is checked by darkening each
individual channel (using a clean stick).
▪▪ The A/D values hit the maximum value
(circa -32,768) when dark.
When the clean stick is removed, the values briefly go to

circa 32,768 before returning to normal (0).
72
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Liquid System
The Item Liquid system is used to check all functions related to the liqud system. Pumps, valves, dilutor and Liquid
sensor.
Fill system
Activating this menu item fills the entire tube system and removes any air bubbles.
Activate
▪▪ The needle moves to the “Wash position” after moving to the “Home position”.
▪▪ The outside of the needle is washed. The waste water pump runs constantly.
▪▪ The wash water pump and water solenoid valve are turned on and off simultaneously.
▪▪ The dilutor‘s solenoid valve opens, the syringe, the pipetting tube and the needle are all filled with water.
▪▪ To check for any leaks in the system, the needle moves to the wash position and stays in its Z-home position.
In order to assure a sealed tube system, this function should be run three times. If any droplets form on the tip of the
needle, the system must be checked for leaks.
Test sensitivity of liquid sensor

▪▪ Activating this menu item, the needle moves over the corresponding position. By pressing
e the needle moves into the prepared cup. (see chapture operations)
▪▪ The LED blinks if liquid is detected (Message: “Liquid found”).
▪▪ Repeat the test 5 times in order to be sure the adjustment is stable.
▪▪ Remove the cup and insert the second prepared cup with less liquid.(see chapture operations)
▪▪ Repeat the test 5 times in order to be sure the adjustment is stable (Message: “Needle is dry”).
Test stability of liquid sensor

▪▪ Activating this menu item, the needle moves over the corresponding position.
The needle moves into the prepared cup. (see chapture operations)
▪▪ Tap the Z-axis, the needle receptacle and the sensor cable with a non conductive object (such as a clean stick).
▪▪ The message “Needle is dry” must be displayed during this entire
procedure (tapping with a non conductive object).
www.biolabo.fr 73
Service manual
Adjusting
Adjust liquid sensor

Activating this menu item, the needle moves over the corresponding position where the procedure for the adjust-
ment start.
The detailed description is located at the chapture “operations”
Pumps
Activates the wash and waste water pumps in order to wash the outside of the needle. The wash water pump and
water solenoid valve are turned on and off simultaneously. The waste water pump runs constantly.
Magnetic valve dilutor

The dilutor‘s solenoid valve is switched on together with the fast wash pump (the magnetic valve opens). The need-
le moves to the wash station and dispenses water.
Dilutor drive
When this item is activated, the dilutor moves to the exchange position. The syringe can then be exchanged. If this
point is activated again, the syringe moves back to the home position.
Needle change
The needle moves to “Home position” and then to the “Exchange position”.
The syringe simultaneously moves to its exchange position in order to prevent liquid dripping from the needle
during the exchange procedure.
Sampler encoder x-axis

Activating this menu item, the sampler moves from the left to the right.
Sampler encoder y-axis

Activating this menu item, the sampler moves backwards and forwards.
Sampler encoder z-axis

Activating this menu item, the needle moves upwards/ downwards.
Sampler Home
The sampler moves to its home position.
74
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Sensors
This item is used control, testing and adjusting the system sensors.
Temperature adjust
▪▪ A chart with default temperatures is displayed.
▪▪ To control the temperature, fill the test holes with about 100μl dest. water.(at the cuvette
rack transport and measuring unit). for the reagent block, add 2ml water in pos8
▪▪ Wait approx 5 minutes.
▪▪ Place a thermometer (for example, a digital thermometer with a metal measuring cap) in the hole.
▪▪ Adjust the potentiometer on the TBB PCB until it is the same as the default temperature displayed in
the test hole. Wait ca. 5 minutes for the temperature to adjust before remeasuring or readjusting.
Adjust water sensor

Please fill system once you adjust the water sensor. By activating the submenu, the analyzer is set the sensor for the
wash solution. For detailed procedure description refer to chapture “Operations”
Water level
Status request of the water sensor. to actuate the sensor status/message press e
Count balls in cuv. rack

Displays the number of counted ball in the cuvettte bars which are transported cross the Sensor (incubation positi-
on1). The counter is deleted by leaving the menu. The cuvette rack must transport via the menu MOTORS>PIPET.
When select now the option SENSORS> COUNT BALLIN CUV. RACK in the messagebox is shown 4balls.
By moving the cuvette rack into measuring unit via MOTORS the ball sensor count again 4balls.
(cause of leaving the menu)
Cuv. rack in stack position

This is a status request on the transport conveyor sensor. It checks if a cuvette bar was transported from the cuvette
register. The cuvette bar presses the toothed wheel on the M0,1 motor and switches the sensor.
www.biolabo.fr 75
Service manual
Adjusting
Cuv. rack in waiting position

This is a status request on the incubation sensor to see if a cuvette bar has reached the wait position.
Measuring position incub.

Checks if the measuring unit sensor is in the entry (incubation) position.
Measuring position process

Checks if the measuring unit sensor is in the measuring position.
Measuring stirring counter

The system checks the rotation speed of the mixing unit in the measuring unit for about 60 seconds.
▪▪ The measuring unit tips.
▪▪ The mixing unit in the measuring unit is started.
▪▪ An optical sensor detects the mixing unit‘s revolutions.
▪▪ The detection takes place over the hole in the magnet holder in channel one.
▪▪ The rotational speed of the mixing unit is displayed in the message box after 60 seconds
▪▪ Normal rotation speed is between 390 RPM +/-40RPM.
If the rotational speed is too low (below 350), then the mixing unit is either defective or the motor’s O-ring (which
goes to the mixing unit) is broken.
The carrier at the sample input buffer moves to the sample barcode area. If any sample racks are located inside the
sample input buffer, the racks are transported together to the sample barcode area. The carrier stops if the last sam-
ple rack is pushed; the overload current signal the software that the sample rack is in the correct position. A light
gap contols a located rack in the sample ID terminal position.
The carrier moves the current rack to the first pipetting position. The rack is fixed in position by means of the sample
rack clamp. The first pipetting position is contolls by a light gap.
76
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
EPROMs
Functions of the item is to display the current Eprom (Firmware) versions for each individual module.
and update function for each module or to update all in one
Versions
Use this option to display the current Firmware versions on the different controllers of the analzyers.
Update single controller

To updat a single controller, select the to be updated controller.
▪▪ TMC main controller
▪▪ TLH Liquid handler
▪▪ TBC Baseboard controller
▪▪ TDF Measuring module
Select in the appear list the needed version and press e

To start the update press e
A status of transmittet lines is displayed. During the update proccess it is not possible to to abort.
When the update is complete, the option ECSAPE appear on the screen.
When the proccess is stopped without finishing, it is possible to leave with ^
Update all in one

Use this option to check the compatibility between the firmware versions and the current software version.
If any discrepancies exist, all incompatible firmware versions will be updated.
www.biolabo.fr 77
Service manual
Adjusting
Comterm
Comterm stands for “Communication Terminal“. Individual functions can be checked and/or tested.
Commands can be sent to all modules/units or the current status can be requested. It is also possible to check the
sensors and buttons of the instrument. Comterm commands always consist of two parts: the first code is written in
small letters and determines the module.
Examples
Commands
The operation to be executed is written in capital letters. If a sensor or function is tested, the status is displayed in
the right column.
Module Command
Sampler al
Sampler CPU an
Incubator ae
Rack transport /Scanner rp
Cuvette transport m
Examples for sampler commands

Home commands
X/Y/Z Home alHOM
X/Y Home alHXY
Z-Home alHOZ
Y-Home alHOY
X-Home alHOX
W-Home alHOW
Move commands
Move X axis 200 steps alDRX200
Move Y axis 200 steps alDRY200
Move Z axis 200 steps alDRZ200
Move X 200 steps and Y 1000steps alDXY200,1000
Move W axis 200 steps (Dilutor) alDRW200

78
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Adjusting
Max. position of the axis

X max. 2875
Y max. 2070
Z max. 1380
W max. 4200
Sampler CPU
Hardware version query anVID
Base Board SW version query anVSW
Base Board Hardware version query anVHW
Switching off sampler hold current anDDI

Switching on sampler hold current anDEN
www.biolabo.fr 79
Service manual
Adjusting
Exit
This function is to leave the program. Depending on the login, the login screen or the service desktop appears.
80
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Casing
Casing
In this chapter describes following all procedures to remove, assemble the casing or casing units to servicing the
different modules of the analyzer.
Table of content
Case segment removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Overview.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Remove the protection cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Remove the front cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Remove the main case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Remove the sampler cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cover removing for service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Main case:Segment removing for service
www.biolabo.fr 81
Service manual
Casing
Overview
ID Description
1
3
Protection cover
Front cover
Main case
82
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Casing
Case segment removing

Following is described the way to remove the different cover segments.
The instrument should be switched off.
Remove the protection cover

▪▪ Open the Protection cover.
▪▪ Remove the screws on both sides. ID Description
▪▪ Remove the metal plates.
▪▪ Close the protection cover Screw 2 1
▪▪ Pull the protection cover to your side.
Metal plate
Protection cover
www.biolabo.fr 83
Service manual
Casing
Remove the front cover

▪▪ Remove the cover screws.
▪▪ Remove all accessories at ID Description
the pipetting area.
1. Cover crew
▪▪ Move the sampler Y/Xxais
2. Pipetting area
manually to the back.
2 1
3. Front cover
▪▪ Lift up the cover approx. 5cm
and 5cm to your side.
▪▪ Disconnect the flat cable below. 1
3
▪▪ Remove the cover complete.
Remove the main case

Disconnect the water tubes, the UBS cable,
power line, LIS connection (if used) ID Description
Reove the cover screws 2
Remove the cuvette rack register Cover screw
Remove the front cover (see „replacing the
front cover“) cuvette rack register
Disconnect the cable for the light bar.
Lift up the Main cover. Front cover 3
Optional you can remove the 1
1
1
1 1
1
84
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Casing
Remove the sampler cover

▪▪ Remove the main case See
„removing the main case“. ID Description 3
▪▪ Remove the pipetting tube
from the needle. Cover screw 1
▪▪ Lift the Z-axis up. and to the front 1
Zylinder screw 2
▪▪ Remove the cover crews and
the zylinder screws. Sampler cover 2
▪▪ pull the sampler cover aprox.
10cm in the front.
▪▪ Turn the cover against the clock 90 degree
▪▪ Remove it comlete.
www.biolabo.fr 85
Service manual
Casing
Cover removing for service

Following is listed which cover must be removed to service the different analyzer units.
Front cover:
▪▪ Water system
▪▪ Reagent area
▪▪ Sample scanner.
Main case:
▪▪ Mains unit
▪▪ Measuring unit
▪▪ Dilutor
Main case + sampler cover:

▪▪ Cuvette Transport
▪▪ Sampler
86
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Units
This chapter describes all modules and units of the analyzer.
Wow to dis/re assembling each module and what checks are to be made after replacement.
Table of content
Units overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
PCB board overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Units connections diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Mains Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Electrical connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
PCB TIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
PCB TMC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
PCB TBB (main board). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Sampler & Dilutor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Sampler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Dilutor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Cuvette rack transport system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cuvette transport unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Measuring unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pump unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sample scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Reagent station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
www.biolabo.fr 87
Service manual
Units
Units overview
ID Description
Mains unit
Sampler
2
Dilutor
Cuvette rack transport unit

6
4
Measuring unit
5
10
Pump unit
8 7
Reagent station
Sample scanner
Keypad
Plasma block
Cuvette rack ragister
8
3
6
1
88
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
PCB board overview
ID Description
PCB INC-8S
PCB TUC-8S
PCB TLB8-DW 3
1 4
PCB TDF8-DW
PCB DSA
2
PCB THG
PCB TIA
PCB TBB
PCB TMC
PCB SLD
6
PCB Modul Behnk 3+1
PCB TLH
9 10
5
8
12
11
www.biolabo.fr 89
Service manual
Units
PCB board Functions
Mains Unit
TIA
▪▪ Communication to the PC. (Serial-USB converter)
▪▪ Water sensor connection and circut.
▪▪ Host connection.
▪▪ External host connection for a second system (daisy chain)
TBB
▪▪ Supply current for all modules.
▪▪ Temperature regulation for the cuvette rack transport, measuring block and reagent station.
▪▪ Includes the main control processor.
▪▪ Includes a slot for the TMC PCB, the main communication processor.
▪▪ Checks and controls the sensors.
▪▪ Regulates the pumps.
▪▪ Speaker control for messages and alarm.
▪▪ Motor breaking circuit for the tipping motor.
TMC
▪▪ Main communication processor
RMC
▪▪ 5 Volt supply
▪▪ 24 Volt supply
▪▪ Motor driver for the Sample Rack Transport.
▪▪ Over current sensor Sample Rack transport motors.
▪▪ Includes the main control processor for rack control.
▪▪ Supply for the RFID control.
▪▪ Driver for the Scanner, Reagent Scan and Sample Rack Scan.
▪▪ Scanner Beam driver.
▪▪ Includes a slot for the main control processor for rack control.
Transfer and Dilutor

TLH
▪▪ Main Board for Transfer and Dilutor.
▪▪ Includes a slot for the PCB Modul 3+1.
PCB Modul Behnk 3+1

▪▪ Sub controller for transfer and dilutor.
▪▪ Motor driver transfer and dilutor.
▪▪ Controls the pump unit.
▪▪ Main control processor for transfer and dilutor.
SLD
▪▪ Circuit for the probe sensor.
▪▪ Connection board for:
motors, encoders, and light gabs Y/Z.
90
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
DSA
motor, encoder, and light gab W
▪▪ Connection magnet valve.
Cuvette Rack transport

INK4A
▪▪ Sub controller for transport convejor.
▪▪ Connection board for
motors, pioviatal magnetes, proximity swithes, ball sensor, heater.
BID
▪▪ Ball identification sensor.
Measuring block
TLB 4.2
▪▪ Drivers for the LED
▪▪ transport motor for positioning the cuvette rack
▪▪ tipping motor for measuring block positioning
▪▪ Mixing unit for mixing the samples
▪▪ measuring, transport motor for ejecting the cuvette rack
▪▪ Positioning sensors.
TDF-DW
▪▪ Sub controller for measuring block.
▪▪ Photo diodes
▪▪ Photocurrent converter.
▪▪ Analog filter
▪▪ A/d converter
▪▪ Digitalfilter
▪▪ LED regulation for the 405nm and 620nm LEDs.
▪▪ Measuring Modul Controler.
www.biolabo.fr 91
Service manual
Units
Units connections diagram
TDF 8-DW
I16
DSA Modul Behnk BID

A INK-8S
Dilutor 3+1 Ball Sensor TLB 8-DW
I 10 Cuvette Transport
Sampler
TLH
SLD
B
Probe Sensor
i5 K2
i8
Power
supply
I9 TMC
Main Contoller
TBB
Power Management /Devise Control
I4
J22 L4 M41
TIA Sub Controller
HGA Cuvette Transport System
CKP BRA Hoopguarde
i6 Rotor Board Mains Unit
Cooling K3 Adapter
Sampler & Dilutor
Pump Unit
USB M40
Reagent Cooling
Keypad
TUC-8S CRM
THG Sample / Scann
Keypad Cooling
Scanner left Hoopguarde
Pumps Hoopguarde
92
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Mains Unit
Functions
The Mains unit transform andd istribute the incomming power and informations to all units of the analyzer.
Components
Following components are in the mains unit: Main connection
Following each component is described sepeately.
ID Description 5
TIA PCB
TBB PCB
3
TMC PCB 2
Power supply
4
1
Protective cover
ID Description
EXT socket
8
1
HOST socket
Mains switch 2
Main fuses
8
Mains socket 3
6
USB socket 4
5 7
Water sensor socket 9
www.biolabo.fr 93
Service manual
Units
Electrical connections
Power supply
Functions
▪▪ Mains switch
▪▪ Primary over current protection (primary fuses)
▪▪ Transform the voltage. (Input voltage 100 VAC – 265 VAC 47–63 Hz. Output voltage + 24 V DC / 14 A.)
ID Descrition 2
Screws 4
Protection panel
Secondary power plug
Power supply
3
1
Replacing the power supply

Remove
▪▪ Disconnect the mains cable.
▪▪ Remove the assembly screws .
▪▪ Remove the protective cover.
▪▪ Remove the J14 connector from the secondary connection on the PCB TBB .
▪▪ Unscrew the power supply wires and remove from the mains unit.
▪▪ Pull the power supply upwards and out of the instrument.
Assemble
▪▪ Inserting the new power supply.
▪▪ Replace and tighten the assembly screws. Connect the J14 connector to the PCB TBB.
▪▪ Reconnect the power supply wires in their correct positions.
▪▪ Refer to the mains unit for further information!
Checks after replacement

▪▪ Swith the System on .
▪▪ Check the LED function on the power supply.
▪▪ Messure the output Valage on the secondary connection 24V +- 2V
94
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
PCB TIA
Functions
▪▪ Connection to TBB-PCB
▪▪ Connection PC (USB)
▪▪ Sensor wash water
▪▪ EXT
▪▪ HOST
Replacing the PCB TIA
ID Description 1
Protective cover
TIA PCB board

2
I4 cable plug
Mains unit 3
Remove
▪▪ Disconnect all external connections.
▪▪ Remove the protective cover from the mains unit .
▪▪ Remove the I4 cable from the PCB TIA .
▪▪ Unscrew the PCB TIA. Use the holes on the mains unit to access the screws.
▪▪ Remove the PCB TIA – upwards and out of the mains unit.
Assemble
▪▪ Insert the new PCB TIA and attach securely to the mains unit.
▪▪ Reconnect the I4 cable with the PCB TIA.
▪▪ Remount the protective cover on the mains unit.
▪▪ Connect the USB cable from the PC .
▪▪ Connect the water sensor .
▪▪ Connect the Host/LIS connection.
▪▪ Connect an external system (if necessary)
▪▪ Connect the mains cable.
▪▪ Switch on the analyzer
▪▪ Adjust the water sensor.
www.biolabo.fr 95
Service manual
Units

▪▪ Open menu item SENSORS in the Adjusting program.
▪▪ Select menu item ADJUST WATER SENSOR.
▪▪ Remove the sensor from the wash container.
▪▪ Press e to adjust/set the sensor.
▪▪ A message box displays “water sensor is adjusted”.
▪▪ Put the sensor back in the wash container.
▪▪ Select menu item WATER SENSOR
▪▪ Press e ”Water sensor OK” must be displayed.
▪▪ Disconnect all external connections.
▪▪ Re-assemble all cover segments.
▪▪ Re-connect all external connections.
▪▪ Attach the fresh water and waste water tubes.
▪▪ Attach the tubes on the dilutor left and right connectors.
PCB TMC
Functions
▪▪ Main communication processor
Replacing the PCB TMC
Remove
▪▪ Unscrew the two fixing screws of the PCB TMC from the TBB-Board.
▪▪ Pull at the upper left and right hand side of the board to disconnect the board.
Assemble
▪▪ Connect the PCB TMC to the plug at the PCB TBB and securely tighten the screws.

▪▪ Switch the system on.
▪▪ Open the Adjusting program.
▪▪ Message with the wrong software is displayed.
▪▪ Open the Eprom menu.
▪▪ Check the software versions
▪▪ Use Update TMC Main CPU.
▪▪ Update to the latest version needed by the system.
96
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
PCB TBB (main board)
Functions
(layout diagrams could differ slightly if board modifications are made)
The PCB TBB drives and controls all of the analyzer functions. The following functional blocks can be found on the
PCB TBB:
▪▪ Supply current for all modules.

▪▪ Temperature regulation for the cuvette rack transport, measuring block and reagent station.
▪▪ Includes the main control processor.
▪▪ includes a slot for the PCB TMC, the main communication processor.
▪▪ Checks and controls the sensors.
▪▪ Driver for Pumps and magnet valves.
▪▪ Speaker control for messages and alarm.
▪▪ Motor breaking circuit for the tipping motor.
All modules are connected to the PCB TBB. Refer to the diagram for more information.
Fuses
▪▪ F1 (1) Reagent cooling block 3 .15 AT
▪▪ F4 (2) Supply current 3 .15 AT
▪▪ F5 (3) Sampler, dilutor, rack management RMC 3 .15 AT
▪▪ F6 (4) Cuvette rack transport 3 .15 AT
▪▪ F7 (5) Measuring block module 3 .15 AT
The status of F1 to F7 can be checked by viewing the corresponding LED. The LED will signal when a fuse is defecti-
ve.
www.biolabo.fr 97
Service manual
Units
LED functions
6 7 1
4 3
9
8
ID
Description Standy condition
24V main power supply on
Fuse indicators off
Heating control for the measuring block blinks when temperature has been reached
Heating control for the cuvette rack transport
blinks when temperature has been reached
TMC processor is active blinks slowly = OK
blinks quickly = Problem with the firmwar
98
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Test points
ID Description
TP 1 + 12 Volt supply current
TP 2 + 5 Volt supply current
TP 3 GND = ground 2
TP8 I-Pelt 3
Reagent temp. control
4
1
www.biolabo.fr 99
Service manual
Units
Connectors
12 13
15
14 16
5 7 8 9
1 2 3 4
10 11
ID Description
Measurement module
Front cover keypad
Waste (not used)
LED (not used)
Reagent cooling (not used)
Reagent cooling
Reagent cooling (peltier element not used)
RMC reagent and sample rack controller
100
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Replacing the PCB TBB

Remove
▪▪ all cables must be removed before the PCB TBB can be replaced.
▪▪ the main communication processor (TMC) must be removed from he old PCB TBB and mounted on the new one .
Assemble
▪▪ Adjust the temperature for the measuring block, reagent cooling and
cuvette rack transport. Wait until LED 3 and 4 blink.
▪▪ Adjust the water sensor.
▪▪ Update the firmware
▪▪ Open the Adjusting program
▪▪ Message with wrong software is displayed
▪▪ Open the Eprom menu
▪▪ If the „ready“ message is not displayed after the Adjusting program is started, check the Eprom versions.

All adjustments and controls are done via the Adjusting program.
▪▪ Check the firmware version on the PCB TBB (TBC baseboard)
▪▪ Check LED functions.
▪▪ Check the voltage on the test points.
▪▪ Check the stack sensors at the cuvette rack transport
▪▪ Completely clear the cuvette rack transport track.
▪▪ Sensor is closed.
▪▪ Select CUV.RACK IN STACK POSITION.
▪▪ Message “No strip in depot” must be displayed.
▪▪ Push the cogwheel cuvette rack transport motor 0,1mm by hand
▪▪ Sensor is open.
▪▪ Message “Strip in depot” must be displayed.
▪▪ Check the sensors waiting position left / right: at the cuvette rack transport
▪▪ Completely clear the cuvette rack transport track.
▪▪ Sensor is closed.
▪▪ Select CUV.RACK in waiting position left.
▪▪ Message “Strip not at waiting position left” must be displayed.
▪▪ Push the cogwheel cuvette rack transport motor 1mm by hand
▪▪ Sensor is open.
▪▪ Message “Strip OK” must be displayed.
▪▪ Check measuring block position sensors
▪▪ The measuring block is in its entry position. Press e
▪▪ The contact has been triggered. “Sensor incu is ok“ is displayed.
▪▪ Move the measuring block up by hand.
▪▪ The entry position could not be reached.
▪▪ The contact has not been triggered. “Sensor incu is not ok“ is displayed.
▪▪ Measuring position process
▪▪ The measuring block is in its entry position. Press e
▪▪ The contact has been triggered. “Sensor process is ok“ is displayed.
▪▪ Move the measuring block up by hand. The entry position could not be reached.
▪▪ The contact has not been triggered. “Sensor process is not ok“ is displayed.
▪▪ Check the stirring counter
▪▪ Open the ADJUSTING > MOTORS
www.biolabo.fr 101
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Activate MEASURING STIRRING COUNTER e

▪▪ This test takes about 60 seconds
▪▪ The measuring block tips.
▪▪ The mixing unit in the measuring block is started.
▪▪ The rotational speed of the mixing unit is displayed in the message box after 60 seconds
▪▪ Normal rotation speed is from 380 RPM +/-20 .
▪▪ Check the ball sensor
MOTORS e
PIPET e
^
SENSORS e
COUNT BALLS IN CUV.RACK e
„Counted 4 balls in strip” must be displayed.
▪▪ Check the analyzer keypad

▪▪ Open COMTERM
▪▪ Press each keypad button, one after the other. Control if the correct information is displayed.
Stop bottom = Key1
Alarm off bottom= Key 0
▪▪ After testing restart the adjusting program.
102
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Sampler & Dilutor
Functions
The sampler and dilutor are responsible to transfer the liquids to the cuvette.
The sampler moves the needle which aspiate and dispense the liquids to the cuvette at the pipetting position.
The syringe in the dilutor is conected with the pipetting tube direct to the needle. the whole System (needle, pipet-
ting tube, syringe) is filled with water. The dilutor moves the syringe up and downwards and change in this way high
precise the total volume. In this way it is possible to aspirate the liquids.
TBB PCB
Main unit
TLH-PCB
TMM-PCB
Main Board Sampler and Dilutor
SLD-PCB DSA-PCB
Pipetting arm Dilutor
Motor Y
Encoder Y Light gap X
Motor W
Light gap Y
Encoder W
Motor Z
Light gap W
Encoder Z Encoder X
Light gap Z
Needle sensor
Motor X
www.biolabo.fr 103
Service manual
Units
Sampler
Functions
The sampler transport the aspirate liquids with the needle to the cuvette at the pipetting position.
Components
ID Description
3 14
Pipetting arm
1 12
Sample positioning unit
7
13
Needle guide cpl. 4 8 9
2 5
Opto-Coupler cpl.
10 6
Needle support cap cpl. 11

15 16
Drive belt X
Drive belt Y
Drive belt Z
Motor Z cpl.
Replacing the sampler

Remove
▪▪ Remove the water sensor and tube from the washing tank.
▪▪ Remove the fluids from the system (Adjusting, Fill System).
▪▪ Remove the needle and the pipetting tube.
▪▪ Disconnect the instrument and remove the instrument casing.
▪▪ Remove the curtain and stop guide.
▪▪ Remove the cable from the sampler.
▪▪ Remove the sampler from the base plate.
Assemble
▪▪ Place the sampler in the instrument and secure.
▪▪ Connect the internal cable for communication to the TBB PCB.
▪▪ Place the dilutor in the instrument and secure.
▪▪ Connect the sampler’s flat band cable to the dilutor. Place the ferrite core over the
cable so that it is directly before the connector on the dilutor’s PCB DSA.
▪▪ Connect the 5 mm tube to the solenoid valve, and connect to the fast-
wash pump. Place the tube in the holder of the sliding guide.
▪▪ Set the dip switch on the TLH-PCB for the corresponding instrument. Dip switch function 5
7 On Set all other dip switches to OFF.
▪▪ Replace the instrument casing
▪▪ Insert the needle and connect the pipetting tube to the needle.
104
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Reconnect the instrument back on.

▪▪ Check the eprom version via ADJUSTING>EPROMS
▪▪ Adjust the arm positions. ADJUSTING > SAMPLER POSITIONS.
▪▪ Fill tube system ADJUSTING > LIQUID SYSTEM LEFT AND LIQUID SYSTEM RIGHT > FILL SYSTEM.
▪▪ Adjust the needle sensor. ADJUSTING > SENSORS > TEST LIQUID SENSOR.
Replacing the Y-Z axis sampler arm
If errors occur on the mechanics of the Y-drive (defective drive belt or the sliding Y-carriage), it is recommended to
change the arm. Due to the complex construction of the arm unit, it is recommended to send the complete arm to
Behnk Elektronik for repair.
▪▪ Remove the fluids from the system ADJUSTING > LIQUID SYSTEM > FILL SYSTEM
▪▪ Remove the needle and the pipetting tube.
▪▪ Disconnect the instrument and remove the instrument casing.
▪▪ Remove the flat cable from the SLD-PCB.
▪▪ Unscrew the Y-Z unit from the base
▪▪ Mount the new Y-Z unit (arm) . The Z-axis must be in the Home position
▪▪ Reconnect the flat cable to the SLD-PCB. Place the ferrite core over
the cable so that it is directly before the connector.
Note: Bend the cable for the SLD-PCB slightly upwards.
▪▪ Replace the instrument casing

▪▪ Insert the needle and connect the pipetting tube to the needle.
▪▪ Reconnect the instrument back on.
▪▪ Reinstall the default arm positions ADJSTING > SAMPLER MANAGEMENT” > READ POSITIONS FROM USB STICK
▪▪ Adjust the sampler positions if neccessary .
▪▪ Fill tube system ADJUSTING > LIQUID SYSTEM > FILL SYSTEM
www.biolabo.fr 105
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Adjust the needle sensor. ADJUSTING > SENSORS > TEST LIQUID SENSOR
▪▪ Exit the Adjusting program

▪▪ Test the positions of the needle
▪▪ Test the sensitivity of the needle sensor.
Replacing the Z axis
Attention!
The Z axis must be in its home position before it can be changed. The axis can only be removed and re-moun-
ted in its home position.
ID Description
Z-axis support
Screws
Z-axis
1
Belt
2 3
Remove
▪▪ Move the arm to its home position. ADJUSTING > ARM > HOME. Pull the Z axis up manually until it stops.
▪▪ Mark the transition position from the U-profile to the drive belt.
▪▪ Remove the sample positioning unit.
▪▪ Remove the 4 screws and then remove the axis sideways.
106
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Assemble
▪▪ Push the carriage unit on the Z axis against the lower needle receptacle sideways into the arm
carriage.
Please pay attention to the fact that when inserting the Z axis to the mechanical stop, the mark
on the U-profile and drive belt (marked when the unit was removed) is not moved!
▪▪ lnsert the screws and move the Z axis by hand. Control the temporary marking when the Z
axis is in its home position. lf the mark is not aligned, then redo the previous steps.
▪▪ Tighten the screws. Please pay attention that the Z axis is indeed perpendicular to the arm.
▪▪ Control the settings for the signallingmechanism and correct it if necessary.
▪▪ ln addition, pay attention to the securing screws. They should not be in the “grooves“ of
the spline shaft. lf this is the case, repeat step 1 after moving the unit one tooth.
▪▪ Attach the sample positioning unit.

▪▪ Controll the Arm Home Position.Readjust the Arm position if neccessary.
▪▪ Check the needle sensor
Replacing the needle guide
ID Description 1
Needle clip
Needle guide
2
Screw 4
Z-axis 3
Remove
▪▪ Remove the sensor cable from the needle guide.
▪▪ Remove the needle.
Assemble
When installing a new needle guide, pay attention to the fact that light pressure needs to be applied to the Z axis
while the guide is being secured. This is done to assure that the unit is grounded (for the sensor).
▪▪ lnstall the sensor cable and needle.
▪▪ Check the needle sensor‘s settings (adjustment).

▪▪ Open ADJUSTING PROGRAM
▪▪ Select LIQUID SYSTEM>FILL SYSTEM The analyzer tubing system filled.
▪▪ Test the sensivity of liquid sensor
▪▪ Test the stability of liquid sensor
▪▪ When sensivity or stability are not ok readjust the Probe sensor via Adjust liquid sensor.
www.biolabo.fr 107
Service manual
Units
Replacing the SLD board

Remove
▪▪ Remove the sensor cable.
▪▪ Remove the flat cable for Z supply .
▪▪ Remove the flat cable for Y supply .
▪▪ Remove the ferrite from both flat cables and remove the cable from the PCB guide.
▪▪ Disconnect Y-motor/ Y-encoder and Y- home optocoupler.
▪▪ Disconnect Z-motor/ Z-encoder and ZY- home optocoupler .
▪▪ Unscrew the SLD board.
Assemble
▪▪ Replace the SLD board
▪▪ Fix the the board with the screws
▪▪ reconnect all cables.
▪▪ Check the arm home positin
▪▪ Check the Z-encoder funktion
▪▪ Check the Y- encoder function
▪▪ Fill the system
▪▪ Readjust the Probe sensor
108
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Replacing the flat cable
ID Description 1
Flatcable
TLH PCB
TMM PCB 2
Sockeds for flat cable 4
3
▪▪ Connect the main PCB to the dilutor and SLD-PCB.

▪▪ Removing the defective dilutor. cable
▪▪ For these steps, it is best to remove the entire sampler from the instrument‘s base plate.
Remove the screws on the securing plate.
▪▪ Remove the guiding plate for the band cable.
▪▪ Remove cables from the PCB connectors and cable for x-y movement left and right (dilutor cable for left and right
Installing the new cable X-Y-W movement

▪▪ Place the cable loosely on the bridge and insert under the carriage.
▪▪ Set the guiding plate. The cable should be visible from the outside.
▪▪ Connect the cable to the main PCB .
▪▪ The cable‘s contact surfaces must point towards the PCB .
▪▪ lnsert the screws while pressing the guide plate down.
▪▪ lnsert the cable into the PCB guide, and connect the cable to the SLD PCB.
Make sure the ferrite core is flush on the PCB right in front of the connector.
Replacing the X motor

For these steps, it is best to remove the entire sampler
from the instrument‘s base plate.
Remove
▪▪ Remove the light guide, the encoder
and the motor. cable.
▪▪ Remove the screws on the motor console.
▪▪ Remove the motor together with the motor console
Assemble
▪▪ Place the motor over the drive belt
and screw the console back on.
www.biolabo.fr 109
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Reconnect the cable for the motor, encoder and light guide.
▪▪ Check the belt tension and belt movement.

▪▪ Check the Z-encoder funktion
▪▪ Check or readjust the Sampler positions
Replace the Y motor
ID Description
1
Screw
Belt 2
Remove
▪▪ Remove the cable from the motor and the encoder. Remove the screws from the
motor console and downwardly remove the motor with the console.
Assemble
▪▪ lnstall the new motor in the reverse order. The drive belt should slip into place.
Attention: Pay attention to the placement of the motor. It must be inserted completely into the back edge of
the arm casing.
▪▪ Check the Y axis and Y drive belt tension. The drive pulley for the Y motor needs at least 1.5 mm
space from the inside of the U-profile.
Adjust the tension of the drive belt if necessary. The belt tension should be just enough in order
that the belt does not vibrate or sag. Tighten the screws for the mounting/adjustment plate.

▪▪ Check the Y-encoder funktion
▪▪ - check or readjust the Sampler positions
110
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Replacing the Z motor
ID Description
Motor Z-axis
Screws
1
2
Remove
▪▪ Remove the cable from the motor and encoder.
▪▪ Remove the screws from the motor console.
▪▪ Remove the motor by tipping it over the drive belt Z.
Assemble
▪▪ Replace any old or existing motor protectors with new ones.
▪▪ lnsert the motor into the console and simultaneously place the drive belt over the drive wheel.
▪▪ Lightly tighten the screws. Pay attention that all motor dampers are present.
▪▪ Use a screwdriver to adjust the drive belt’s tension between the motor and the arm. Securely fasten the motor.
▪▪ Check the axis for easy movement. Also make sure the drive belt is correctly seated on the drive
pulley. Correct any discrepancies as the belt must fit correctly with the drive pulley!

▪▪ Start the ADJUSTING PROGRAM.
▪▪ Select PROBE HOME POSITION.
▪▪ Check the probe encoder Z-axes function.
▪▪ Check the probe positions.. correct the positons if neccessary.
Replacing the X drive belt
ID Description
Motor X-axis
Belt X-axis
Belt fastener 3 2
4 1
Return pulley X-axis
www.biolabo.fr 111
Service manual
Units
Remove
For these steps, it is best to remove the entire sampler from the instrument‘s base plate.
▪▪ Loosen the screws for the belt lock and the return pulley when changing the belt.
▪▪ Loosen the motor console when changing the right belt.
▪▪ Remove the drive belt.
▪▪ Loosely replace the new drive belt.
Assemble
Tighten the belt lock. Use some form of glue (like Loctite mid-strength #243) to secure the screws.
▪▪ lnsert the end of the belt into the belt lock (two teeth on each side).
▪▪ Tighten the screw . The belt should not be squeezed or pinched when doing this
(The belt should not be deformed when this step is completed).
▪▪ Press the return pulley to adjust the tension of the belt and then tighten the screw when changing the belt.
▪▪ Press the motor console to adjust the tension of the belt and then tighten the screw when changing the belt.

▪▪ Check the X-encoder funktion.
▪▪ Check or readjust the Sampler positions.
Replacing the Y drive belt

Notice:
The Y drive belt is not a spare part to change sepeartely.
In case of drive belt problems exchange the whole piptetting arm.
Make shure that the belt is the problem.
Y motor light barrier and the signalling mechanism are available spareparts.
112
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Replacing the Z drive belt
ID Description
Belt
Motor Z-axis
Motor Y-axis
3
1
Remove
▪▪ Push the drive belt from the drive pulley on the spline shaft towards the motor console. Take the belt
off of the drive pulley motor and slide it out between the Y motor and the drive pulley/spline shaft.
Assemble
▪▪ lnstall the drive belt in the reverse order.

▪▪ Check to make sure the Z axis moves freely and that the drive belt is positioned correctly. lf this is not the case,
it can be corrected by positioning the drive pulley motor. lt is important that the drive belt runs completely
on the pulley. Also check the belt tension. lf needed, loosen the Z motor and adjust the belt tension.
Replacing the signalling mechanism Z-axis

▪▪ Remove the flat cable from the SLD-PCB (SLD-L-PCB).
Unhook the curtain and secure the curtain by placing the
holder in the appropriate hole located on the curtain base
plate (attention: the spring is under tension).
▪▪ Remove the Y-Z arm from the sampler‘s base unit
(3 x M4x10 DlN 912 securing screws).
www.biolabo.fr 113
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Remove the arm cover.

▪▪ Loosen the drive pulley (Z drive) on the spline shaft .
▪▪ Loosen the signalling mechanism . Pull the spline shaft
forwards (towards the return pulley and through the arm casing)
until the signalling mechanism comes off the shaft.
Attention: Do not remove the spline shaft completely (do not pull
it out of the carriage unit).
▪▪ Replace the spline shaft by pushing the shaft while positioning
the new signalling mechanism between the two opto-couplers.
▪▪ Place the belt drive wheel (Z-drive) on the spline shaft and
insert completely, then tighten securely (3Nm). lf the Z drive
belt has slipped off, then remount it.
Pay attention that the spline shaft has no play when mounted
▪▪ Adjust the signalling mechanism: Pull the Z axis up until it stops.
Place a 1.5 mm Allen wrench between the lower needle
receptacle and the carriage .
The mechanism must be positioned so that the trigger is flush
with the upper edge of the opto-coupler (when viewing
from the bottom side of the arm) as well as enough space
(distance) to all other surrounding surfaces and objects.
Tighten the screw on the signalling mechanism.
Control: Move the Z axis repeatedly and check if the
signalling mechanism and trigger move freely and do not rub
or touch any other surfaces or objects.
▪▪ Remount the arm cover.
▪▪ Remount the arm on the sampler‘s base unit.
Attention: The Z axis must be in its home position!
▪▪ Re-attach the flat cable to the SLD-PCB (SLD-L-PCB).
TLH Board
LED functions on the TLH PCB
LD 8 Blinks when the dilutor‘s solenoid valve is triggered
LD 5 Supply current +24 Volt On
LD 6 Supply current + 5 Volt On
LD 4 Stop is not active Off
LD 9 Liquid detection control Blinks when liquid is detected
LD 3/7 Display for the dilutor‘s encoder signal LD 3 is channel A,
LD 7 is channel B.
114
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
It is not possible for both LED‘s to be on at the same time.
TP 1 GND
TP 2 Supply current +24
TP 3 Supply current + 5
LD 2 Display for the encoder signal from the X, Y, Z axes and their home positions.
A/B = Signal from the encoder. Only one LED can be on.
Home = LED is on when the photoelectric barrier is closed.
Home = LED is on when the photoelectric barrier is closed.
Home = LED is on when the photoelectric barrier is closed
Settings for the SW1 DlP switch on the Sampler - PCB
SW8 OFF
SW7 ON System model
SW6 OFF
SW5 ON
SW4 OFF
SW3 OFF
SW2 OFF
SW1 OFF Selftest setting
Dip switch 5 (Self-test)

lf this switch is set to ON, then the Sampler will run a
pre-defined test program for the sampler and dilutor
once the instrument is turned on.
Once the test has been completed, switch off the instrument and set the dip switch to OFF.
Attention! The pipetting needle must be removed before running the test program.
www.biolabo.fr 115
Service manual
Units
Connections
ID Description
1. Supply current /
communication with Liquid
Management TBB board.
6
2. X-axes motor, encoder and 2
photoelectric barrier.
3. Dilutor
4. Y- axes motor, encoder and
photoelectric barrier
5. Z-axes motor, encoder and 4
photoelectric barrier
5
6. TMM motor driver and
1 3
processor
Remove
▪▪ Remove the TMM-PCB from the TLH-PCB
▪▪ Remove X-axes motor, encoder
and photoelectric barrier
▪▪ Remove Connectors for Y-axes,Z-axes and Dilutor
▪▪ Remove the supply current cable
▪▪ Remove the TLH PCB from the Sampler.
Assemble
▪▪ Set the Dip switche 5 and 7 to ON
▪▪ Mount the new TLH PCB on the sample
▪▪ Connect Cables for Y-axes, Z-axes and Dilutor
▪▪ Connect the supply current cable
▪▪ Mount the TMM PCB on the TLH PCB.

▪▪ Select PROBE HOME POSITION.
▪▪ Check the probe encoder X-axes function.
▪▪ Check the probe encoder Y-axes function.
▪▪ Check the probe encoder Z-axes function.
▪▪ Fill System.
▪▪ Test the sensivity of liquid sensor
▪▪ Test the stability of liquid sensor
▪▪ Fill System.
▪▪ Check via magnet valve dilutor the function.
116
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Dilutor
Functions
The dilutor moves the plunger of the syringe high precise up and down. In this way the needle can arsirate and
dispense liquids.
The highest position is also the home position of the syringe, in which it stays when the analyzer is not pipetting.
Components
ID Description
Tube connector cpl.

1
Solenoid valve cpl.
2
Cable plug
6
O-ring dilutor 4
Hamilton syringe
Pipetting tube connector

5
Replacing the solenoid valve

Remove
▪▪ Remove the fluids from the system
ADJUSTING > LIQUID SYSTEM > FILL SYSTEM.
▪▪ Remove the pipetting tube.
▪▪ Switch off the instrument and
remove the instrument casing.
▪▪ Remove the syringe.
www.biolabo.fr 117
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Remove the tube (the one that goes from the solenoid valve to the SW pump) at the pump.
▪▪ Remove the solenoid valve/ head piece .
Assemble
▪▪ Install the new solenoid valve and connect it to the PCB.
▪▪ Place the O-ring in the syringe opening of the valve.
▪▪ Replace the syringe.
▪▪ Reconnect the tube (SW pump to solenoid valve).
▪▪ Attach the pipetting tube and connect it to the needle.
▪▪ Fill tube system ADJUSTING PROGRAM > LIQUID SYSTEM > FILL SYSTEM.
▪▪ Exit the Adjusting program.
▪▪ Replace the casing.
▪▪ Restart the Routine program: “Start Routine.”

▪▪ Start the ADJUSTING PROGRAM
▪▪ Select LIQUID SYSTEM.
▪▪ Fill the tubing system. select FILL SYSTEM
▪▪ Check via MAGNET VALVE DILUTOR the function.
▪▪ The pipetting stream should be vertical and should come out of the probe as a single stream. After
this has been done, the tip of the probe should be checked for any development of water drops.
Water droplets on the tip of the probe are an indication that the system might be leaky.
Replacing the syringe

Remove
▪▪ Login as service and start
the ADJUSTING PROGRAM
▪▪ Select: LIQUID SYSTEM
▪▪ Use the option DILUTOR to
drive the syringe in the
“Change position”.
▪▪ Loosen the tightening bold.
▪▪ Unscrew the syringe.
▪▪ Remove the syringe .
Assemble
▪▪ Mount the new syringe
in reverse order.
Attention: use only siliconized

syringe

▪▪ Select LIQUID SYSTEM.
▪▪ Fill the tubing system. select FILL SYSTEM
▪▪ Check via MAGNET VALVE DILUTOR the function.
▪▪ The pipetting stream should be vertical and should come out of the probe as a single stream. After
this has been done, the tip of the probe should be checked for any development of water drops.
Water droplets on the tip of the probe are an indication that the system might be leaky.
118
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Defective W Motor
The entire dilutor must be exchanged if the W Motor is defective. Replacing the W motor will remove the validity of
the dilutor’s measurement certification (calibration).
www.biolabo.fr 119
Service manual
Units
Cuvette rack transport system
Functions
▪▪ The transport system moves the cuvette rack from the cuvette register to the measuring unit.
▪▪ Cuvette racks are transported by toothed wheels which are driven by motors.
▪▪ The toothed wheels latch into the transportation segment of the cuvette rack frame in order
to move the cuvette rack along the transport track and into the measuring block.
▪▪ Reagents are incubated while they are in the cuvette racks in the transport system.
▪▪ After the transport convejor, the rack is transported to the measuring block.
▪▪ Sensors check the cuvette rack position and the number of balls present in the cuvette rack.
Each motor has two tasks assigned by the software; one during normal rack processing and one during rack
return.
TBB
K2
NTC Heating 1 Heating 2
Heating 1 Heating 2 Tip Motor
NTC
M M M Magnet
K4 IS 1 IS 2 Ball Sensor
Sensor inkub.
TLB 8 DW Sensor process
INC-8S
Rotation Sensor
Mixing Motor
M
i2 i16
M M M SOL 3
Magnet
M
Mixing unit
STM SM 1A SM 1B SM 5
TDF 8 DW
Motor bar Proximity switch / Cuvette rack position controls

Magnet lifter-SR Incubation
introduction cpl.
M Motor transport with freerun M Motor switch SR M Motor transport-SR
M Motor tip M Motor mix M Motor transport with freerun
120
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Components
12
2
11
10
6 8
6 5
7
9
4
3
3
1
1. Motor bar introduction / Uni-directional motor 11. PCB TLB 8 DW

has a fixed position / with free run. 12. Tipping mechanism.
2. Measuring unit
3. Motor switch-SR / Bi-directional motor with
switching lever.
4. Motor transport-SR / Bi-directional motor.
5. Magnet lifter-SR Incubation / pivotal magnets
move the motors.
6. Proximity switch / Proximity switches used to
check the cuvette rack position.
7. Ball sensor / It counts the number of balls in the
cuvettes.
8. Resistor NTC/ sensor for heating elements.
9. Resistor heat foil / Heating elements.
10. PCB INC .
www.biolabo.fr 121
Service manual
Units
Cuvette transport unit
Transport motor types
ID Description
Unidirectional motor 4
with free run.
bi-directional motor
with a switching lever.

1 1 2 3 3
3 3
1 2 2 3
Replacing the cuvette rack transport unit

Remove
▪▪ Remove measuring block
▪▪ Disconnect the connectors to the INC 4A PCB
▪▪ Remove the transport track.
Assemble
▪▪ Place the new transport track on the bolts
122
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Connect the cable on the INC 4A PCB

▪▪ Remount the sample rack transport system.
▪▪ Remount the middle cover and the keyboard front casing.
▪▪ Adjust the parallismen of the Measuring block

▪▪ Open the adjusting program.
▪▪ Check the Function via menu MOTORS.
▪▪ Check the rack transport into the photometer.
Replacing the transport motors

▪▪ The stack motor M0 has a set position.
▪▪ The mounting plate can only be attached in one direction.
▪▪ The motors can be changed with no prior preparation steps.
▪▪ During the mounting procedure, the bearing assemblies must be kept together.
Remove
▪▪ For a better access remove the whole cuvette rack transport unit
▪▪ turn the transport track up side down for a easy access.
▪▪ Disconnect the motor plug from the board which is to be replaced.
▪▪ Remove the locking nut at the motor support.
▪▪ Lift the motor.
▪▪ Remove all parts of the ballbearing from the fixing axis.
Assemble
▪▪ Place the Motor with the support and the two ballbearings as a package to the fixing axis.
www.biolabo.fr 123
Service manual
Units
Notice:
▪▪ The self-locking nut should be fastened so the motor holder is pressed against
the transport track. This is done so the bearing unit locks into place.
▪▪ The self-locking nut is then loosened approx 1/8 turn in order to assure the motor can turn freely.
The spring must easily push the motor in the end position.
Run several cuvette racks via the adjusting software MOTORS> RUNNING PERMANENTELY
trough the measuring unit.
Replacing the motor M5

Remove
▪▪ Before the motors are changed, the pivotal magnet needs to be removed.
▪▪ Then the motor can be pulled out of the magnet’s ring.
▪▪ The motors are mounted in the same manner as motors M1.
Assemble
▪▪ Before the motors are replaced, the pivotal magnet needs to be re-attached.

The pivotal magnet must easily push the motor in the end position.
Replacing the proximity switches
Pay attention to the sensor placement when changing the sensors.
Remove
The switches are inserted into a hole in the transport track upper side and held in place with a headless screw.
▪▪ Remove the transport conveyor.
▪▪ disconnect the plug of the sensor.
▪▪ loosen the headless screw from the upper side. It is located in the hole.
▪▪ pull the sensor backwarts out of the hole.
Assemble
▪▪ Insert the sensor so that it is flush with the transport track’s frame.
▪▪ Press the switching motor against the transport track’s frame when making this adjustment.
▪▪ The IS2 sensor is hidden by the pipette motor support.
▪▪ fix the sensor with M3 headless screws in the hole.
Check after replacement

•Open the adjusting program.
•Check the Function via menu MOTORS
•Check the functions via SENSORS>CUVETTE IN STACK POSITION and CUVETTE IN WAITING POSITION
Sensor placement ok
ID Description
Sensor
Transport motor
support
1 2
124
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Sensor placement is not ok
ID Description
Sensor
Transport motor
support 1 2
Sensor placement is not ok
ID Description
Sensor
Transport motor
1 2
support
www.biolabo.fr 125
Service manual
Units
Replacing PCB INC

Remove
▪▪ Remove the connection to the TBB board.
▪▪ Remove the connection to PCB INK board.
▪▪ Disconnect the proximity switches.
▪▪ Unscrew the pivotal magnets.
▪▪ Remove the PCB.INC
Assemble
▪▪ Pay attention to the NTC sensor placement when assemble the PCB INK.
▪▪ Fix the board with the screws.
▪▪ Assemble the piovital magnets to the board.
▪▪ Connect the proximity switches
▪▪ Reconnect all connections to other boards.

▪▪ Check the Function via menu MOTORS.
▪▪ Check the rack transport into the measuring block.
▪▪ Check the ball sensor.
▪▪ Check the temperature.
▪▪ Check the proximity switches.
126
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Replacing the tipping unit
ID Description 2
2
Tipping unit
Screw
3 1
Transport conveyor 2
1 10
4
5
12 7
11
3
8
6
9
ID Description
Motor transport
Motor tip
Drive unit mixing element
Magnet lifter measuring block
Resitor NTC
PCB TDF 8 DW
PCB TLB 8 DW
www.biolabo.fr 127
Service manual
Units
Remove
▪▪ Unscrew the measuring block and remove the module.
▪▪ Replace the screws from the tipping mechanism.
▪▪ Replace the tipping mechanism.
Assemble
▪▪ Mount the new tipping mechanism in reverse order.
▪▪ Mount the measuring block.

▪▪ Select SENSORS
▪▪ Check/ Adjust the measuring block position Incubation.
▪▪ Check/ Adjust the measuring block position process.
Measuring unit
Functions
The measuring module can measure one cuvette rack containing four cuvettes. These cuvettes are measured simul-
taneously and independently of each other. The measuring unit takes care of all functions required to complete the
measurement:
▪▪ Positioning of the cuvette rack
▪▪ Tipping the cuvette, mixing and measuring the samples
▪▪ Ejecting the cuvette rack
Components
128
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
NTC Heating 1 Heating 2
TBB K2
M M M Magnet
Sensor inkub.
TLB 8 DW Sensor process
M Motor transport with freerun

Rotation Sensor
M
i2 i16
M Motor transport-SR
Mixing unit
M Motor mix
TDF 8 DW
M Motor tip
Replacing the measuring unit

Remove
▪▪ Remove the right cover segment.
▪▪ Remove the flat cable.
▪▪ Loosen the nuts and remove completely the screws.
▪▪ Pull the measuring block from the tipping axis.
www.biolabo.fr 129
Service manual
Units
Assemble
▪▪ Place the measuring unit on the axle so the drill holes
are positioned the same as those on the axle.
▪▪ Insert the headless screws and secure.
▪▪ Place the fastening nut on the other side
of the headless screw and secure.
▪▪ Reconnect the cable for the measuring module.
▪▪ Switch on the system
▪▪ Set the measuring unit to its parallel position.
▪▪ Use the screw to adjust the measuring block
so the transition from the incubator to the
measuring block is smooth and parallel.
▪▪ You can use a cuvette rack to assist in this adjustment.
▪▪ Move it back and forth at the edge of the incubator/
measuring block to check the adjustment.
▪▪ The screw must be secured/tightened
after completing the adjustment.
▪▪ Adjust the Measuring process Position
▪▪ Start the adjusting program.
▪▪ Select SENSORS
▪▪ select MEASURING BLOCK PROCESS POSITION.
▪▪ adjust the right angle
▪▪ adjust the position
▪▪ counter the position with the nut.
▪▪ re check the position with the mounted cover.
▪▪ optimise the position ,the rack is smoothly wasted.
▪▪ remove the cover to optimise the
position if it necessary.
Checks after replacment
▪▪ check the paralysm in both direction visually
▪▪ check via the adjusting program
MOTORS > RUNNING PERMANENTLY
▪▪ Temperature of the measuring unit
▪▪ Speed sensor
▪▪ Sensor Up
▪▪ Sensor Down
▪▪ Lifting magnet
▪▪ Transport motor
▪▪ LED range adjustment for 405 nm and 620 nm
▪▪ Channel cross-talk
▪▪ Q.C. measuremen
Screw to adjust
130
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Replacing the transport motor

Attention: it is not necessary to remove the measuring block from the incubator.
ID Description 2
3
Motor plug
Nut
Motor
1
Remove
▪▪ Disconnect the motor plug.
▪▪ Unscrew the motor
▪▪ Remove the motor.
Assemble
During the mounting procedure, the bearing assemblies must be kept together. The self-locking nut should be fas-
tened so the motor holder is pressed against the transport track. This is done so the bearing unit locks into place.
The self-locking nut is then loosened circa 1/8 turn in order to assure the motor can turn freely.

The spring must easily push the motor in the end position.
Replacing the lifting magnet

Remove
▪▪ Disconnect the plug of the lifting magnet.
▪▪ Loosen the screws.
▪▪ Remove the magnet.
Assemble
▪▪ Mount the new lifting magnet in reverse order.

▪▪ Open Adjusting program.
▪▪ Check the function via Cuvette motors.
www.biolabo.fr 131
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Start check photometer magnet.
Replacing the drive unit mixing unit
ID Description
1
Screw
Plug
2
Mixing unit
1
3
1
1
Remove
▪▪ Disconnect the mixer unit cable.
▪▪ Unscrew the screws.
▪▪ Take out the mixing unit.
Assemble
▪▪ place the mixing unit.
▪▪ insert and thighten the screws.
▪▪ connect the plug.
▪▪ after the complete mechanical installation to the instrument, run the option
at the adjusting program SENSORS>MEASURING MIXING SPEED
▪▪ the mixing unit must run 390+/- 40 turnings.
Replacing the Motor Tip unit

Remove
▪▪ Pull the connector for the motor tip off of the PCB TLB 8 DW.
▪▪ Loosen the screws.
▪▪ Change the tip motor unit.
Assemble
▪▪ Mount the new tipping motor in reverse order

▪▪ Opent the adjusting program
132
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Select Sensors
▪▪ Adjust the measuring block position Incubation.
▪▪ Adjust the measuring block position process.
▪▪ Check the sensor measuring block position Incubation.
▪▪ Check the sensor measuring block position process.
Replacing the PCB TLB 8 DW

Attention: it is not necessary to remove the measuring block from the transport convejor.
2
ID Description
1
Plug
1
1
Screw 3 1
PCB TLB 8 DW
Remove
▪▪ Disconnect all Cables.
▪▪ Unscrew the PCB TLB 8 DW.
▪▪ Remove the PCB TLB 8 DW
Assemble
▪▪ Replace the PCB TLB 8 DW.
▪▪ During the mounting procedure, check the position of the temperature sensor.
▪▪ Fix the the PCB TLB 8 DW with the 4 screws.
▪▪ Temperature 38° ± 0.8°C
▪▪ Speed sensor
▪▪ Sensor Up
▪▪ Sensor Down
▪▪ Lifting magnet
▪▪ Transport motor
▪▪ Q.C. measurement
www.biolabo.fr 133
Service manual
Units
Replacing the PCB TDF 8 DW
6
ID Description 5
2
4
Screw 1
Protective plate
Flat cable
Distance screw
3
PCB TDF 8 DW
Measuring unit
Remove
▪▪ Unscrew the protection plate
▪▪ Disconnect the cable K2
▪▪ Unscrew the PCB TDF 8 DW
▪▪ Remove the PCB TDF 8 DW
Assemble
▪▪ Place the new PCB and assemble in the reverse order.
134
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Checks ater replacement:

▪▪ Speed sensor
▪▪ Q.C. measurement
www.biolabo.fr 135
Service manual
Units
Pump unit
Functions
The pump unit includes all components which is needed to support the washstation and Dilutor with wash water.
Components
ID Description
Fresh water pump 4

waste water pump
6
High preasure pump
Fresh water filter
Waste water filter 5

Solenoid valve
3
1
2
Tube connections
freshwater input
waste water output

to Dilutor
to wash station
from wash station
136
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Replacing the tubes.

Remove
▪▪ Switch off the instrument.
▪▪ Open the front cover.
▪▪ Disconnect the flat cable.
▪▪ Change the tubes.
Attention:
Change the tubes one at a time, do not remove all tubes at once.
Assemble
▪▪ check if all tubes are connected.
▪▪ Execute the procedures „checks after replacement“.
▪▪ Switch the analyzer off.
▪▪ install the front cover.

▪▪ connect all plugs and tubes.
▪▪ Check the function of the new tubes via LIQUID SYSTEM > FILL SYSTEM and MAGETIC VALVE
▪▪ following the procedure „Replace“
Replacing the pumps, tubes, filter and valves

Remove
▪▪ Open the front cover.
▪▪ All single components of the pump unit are screwed on the base plate. Remove the screws on the left side
and loosen the screws on the right side of the base plate. noch you can remove the whole pump unit.
▪▪ Remove the cables from the part which will be replaced. Use a flat caliper to disconnect the plug easier.
▪▪ Unscrew the component which will be replaced.
▪▪ Cut off about 1cm of the tubing before re-attaching. This will assure that the tube system is sealed/ watertight.
Assemble
▪▪ Re-attach the tubes to the component.
▪▪ Reconnect the cables.
▪▪ Be sure to have well plugged in.
▪▪ Re-screw the part on the base plate.
▪▪ Execute the procedures „checks after replacement“.
▪▪ Switch the analyzer off.
▪▪ Connect the flat cable.
▪▪ Install the front cover.

▪▪ Check the function of the new component via Adjusting liquid system.
▪▪ following the procedure „Assemble““
www.biolabo.fr 137
Service manual
Units
Sample scanner
Functions
The sample barcode scanner is an optional feature. When it is installed, it will switch on when the protective cover is
opened. The scan window is on the left side, in front of the sample area.
Components
1 2
ID Description 5
Scanner
Scanner support 3
5
PCB 4
Distance srew
Screw
Replacing the sample scanner

Remove
▪▪ Switch off the analyzer
▪▪ Open the front cover
▪▪ Disconnect the flat cable.
▪▪ Remove the screws on the bottom side.
Assemble
▪▪ Assemble the the scanner in the reverse order of removing.
138
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
▪▪ Start the routine program.

▪▪ Open the protection cover.
▪▪ Select the in the mainmenu sampler preparation.
▪▪ Scan a sample barcode.
www.biolabo.fr 139
Service manual
Units
Reagent station
Functions
The reagent station cooled the reagent block to 16-18°C by a pPeltier element. You can remove the block complete
to insert the reagents. The analyzer can use the loaded substances. when the block is inserted. You also unload racks
directly here, for removal and replacement of substances.
The position 1and 3 are “stirred positions”.
The upper positions next to the wash station are position for the clean and buffer.
Components
ID Description 1
Proximity switch
9
Reagent tray 2
Reagent block sensor 3
10
Cooling plate
4
Mixing motor
Washstation support
Fan
Plug flat cable
Reference point
Pre dilution support

6 1
5
5
8
7
140
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Units
Replacing the reagent station

Remove
▪▪ Open the protection cover.
▪▪ Remove the front cover.
▪▪ Disconnect the flat cable on the front cover.
▪▪ Remove the four screws.
▪▪ Remove the reagent station.
▪▪ Disconnect the flat cable on the reagent station.
Assemble
▪▪ Assemble the reagent station in the reverse order of removing.

▪▪ Start the adjusting program.
▪▪ Insert the sample tray.
▪▪ Insert the reagent block with a cup and a stirrer placed on position 1and 3. the stirrer must rotating in the cup.
▪▪ Select SENSORS> PLASMA BLOCK. The message appear: „plasma block present“.
▪▪ Remove the sample tray and press eagain. Message appear:„plasma block not present“.
▪▪ Add 1ml dest water in position 8. Wait 10min and measure the temperature. It should be in a range of 16-18°C.
▪▪ Remove the water.
Replacing the mixing unit
Remove
▪▪ Disconnect the cable of the mixing motor
▪▪ Remove the 2 screws.
▪▪ Remove the motor.
Assemble
▪▪ Place the motor in position.
▪▪ Fix the motor with the two screws.
▪▪ Plug in the motor cable to the board.
www.biolabo.fr 141
Service manual
Units

▪▪ See „Replacing the reagent station“
Replacing the fan
Remove
▪▪ Disconnect the cable of the fan.
▪▪ Remove the 4 fixing screws.
▪▪ Remove the fan.
Assemble
▪▪ Place the fan in position.
▪▪ Fix the fan with the four screws.
▪▪ Plug in the fan cable to the board.
▪▪ See „Replacing the reagent station“
142
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Operations
This Chapter describes all needed adjustment procedures for the analyzer.
To avoid failures or damages it is recommendet to verify all made settings.
Table of content
Needle:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Syringe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Sampler position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Test position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Liquid Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Water sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Plasma barcode scanner.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Measuring block paralysm.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuration on GUI surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Set time and date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Config Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Config Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Backup and restore options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Backup and restore rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Restart database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Delete database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
www.biolabo.fr 143
Service manual
Operations
Needle:
Remove
▪▪ Remove the pipetting tube from the tubing guide
that is located on top of the sampler cover.
▪▪ Slide the protection tube, which is around the pipetting tube, away from
the upper needle holder of the needle until you see the upper end of
the needle and approximately 10 cm of the transparent pipetting tube.
▪▪ Remove the end of the pipetting tube from the upper

end of the needle by holding the needle with one hand
and pulling the tube upwards with the other hand.
▪▪ Lift up the needle clip in that way the needle
is unlocked from the needle guide
▪▪ Remove the upper end of the needle from its upper needle
holder by holding the socket with one hand and moving the
needle backwards away from the socket with the other hand.
▪▪ While pressing the metal cap of the needle support

upwards, pull the needle upwards to remove it.
144
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Assembly
Replace the needle in reverse order of the removing procedure.
▪▪ Hold the needle with its tip facing down.
▪▪ While pressing the metal cap of the needle support upwards, move
the needle vertically down through the needle support until the
installation cylinder of the needle is completely inside the needle
support. The upper edge of the installation cylinder must be on the Not OK
same level as the upper edge of the needle support. (See pictures)
▪▪ Hold the socket with one hand and move the upper end of the needle
towards the socket into the upper needle holder. You hear a „click“.
▪▪ Move the needle clip on top of the needle guide. the clip must
lock the needle and compeltely down to the needle guide.
▪▪ Put the end of the pipetting tube over the upper end of the
needle by holding the needle with one hand and moving the tube
vertically down with the other hand. The pipetting tube covers
the upper end of the needle and touches the needle guide.
▪▪ Slide the black protection tube, which is around the transparent
pipetting tube, towards the needle guide until it completely OK
covers the pipetting tube and touches the upper needle holder.
▪▪ Fasten the pipetting tube in the tubing guides
on top of the sampler cover.
www.biolabo.fr 145
Service manual
Operations
Syringe
Remove
▪▪ Start the adjusting program
▪▪ Select LIQUID SYSTEM > DILUTOR DRIVE and press e
The syringe plunger moves to
its lower most position.
▪▪ Unscrew the lower syringe holder
by turning it to the left.
loosen
▪▪ Hold the syringe up at it’s upper end and

unscrew the syringe by turning it to the left.
▪▪ The syringe is released from the
upper syringe holder. loosen
▪▪ Remove the syringe.
remove
146
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Assembly
▪▪ Check if the red o-ring is well placed in the inside of upper syringe holder.
▪▪ Hold the syringe vertically with the syringe plunger facing downwards.
▪▪ Place the syringe directly below the upper syringe holder and insert the syringe
plunger into the syringe guide above the lower syringe holder.
▪▪ Hold the syringe at its upper end and turn the syringe to the right
to screw it upwards into the upper syringe holder.
▪▪ While you move the syringe glass tube upwards, the syringe guide holds down the syringe plunger.
▪▪ Screw the lower syringe holder to the right until it is fastened.
▪▪ The lower syringe holder encloses the lower end of the syringe.
▪▪ Leave the sub menu with ^
▪▪ The syringe plunger is moving to it‘s initial position.
www.biolabo.fr 147
Service manual
Operations
Sampler position
Test position
The test position is a position where the user can
check the needle positioning and the straight of the
needle. This position is located on the aluminium pin
between the plasma block and wash station.
Correct Position
▪▪ X/Y axis: Centre of the test point Test position
▪▪ Z axis: barely touch the test point.
Procedure
▪▪ Select in the menu: NEEDLE POSITION > HOME.
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: TEST POSITION.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys so
that the needle is barely touch the reference
point.Press e to save the adjusted position.
Wash position
Correct Position
▪▪ X/Y axis: Centre of the wash station.
▪▪ Z axis: 380 steps lower than than the
WASH POSITION DETECT Z position.
Procedure Wash position
▪▪ Select in the menu: NEEDLE POSITIONS > HOME.
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: WASH POSITION.
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: DEPENDING ON REF. Reference point
▪▪ X/Y axis: Centre of the test point
▪▪ Z axis: the tip of the needle barely
touch the reference point.
▪▪ Press e to save the adjusted position.
148
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Cuvette position
Notice: Adjustment only possible with adjusted

Liquid sensor!
Correct Position
▪▪ X/Y axis: Centre of the cuvette Reference point
rack reference point.
▪▪ Z axis: Needle must barely touch the plastic
(LED of the liquid sensor switch on).
Procedure
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: CUVETTE
POSITION. Cuvette moves to the
pipetting position.During this time, it
is not possible to select any option at the working area.
▪▪ Select in the working area: ALL POSITIONS (DEPENDING ON REF). The needle moves to the reference point.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys so that the needle is centred at the reference point
and the needle barely touch the plastic. The LED of the liquid sensor must switch on.
▪▪ Select now TEST CUVETTE POSITION. The needle moves automatically to all positions of the cuvette rack. It starts
at cuvette 1 (left side) lower hole. Make an visually check that the needle match at all holes the center.
▪▪ Leave with ^
Reagent Positions
Position
Correct position
▪▪ X,Y axis: Needle must be centered in the vial/bottle.
▪▪ Z axis: 5 steps above the vial/bottle bottom.
Procedure
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: REAGENT POSITIONS>ALL POSITIONS (DEP ON REF ).
▪▪ The needle moves to the reference position.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys so that the
needle is centred and barely touch the reference point.
www.biolabo.fr 149
Service manual
Operations
Detect z position
Correct position
▪▪ X,Y axis: Needle tip is at the same Z level as the the used bottle rim of the specific position.
Procedure

▪▪ Select in the sub menu: REAGENT POSITIONS>DETECT Z SINGLE.
▪▪ Type the number of the position which is to be checked/ adjusted and press e
▪▪ The needle moves to the position.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys so that the Needle tip is at the same Z level as the bottle rim.
Notice:
It‘s only need to adjust used positions .
Clean position
Correct position
▪▪ X/Y axis: Centre of the cup.
▪▪ Z axis: 20 steps above the bottom.
Procedure
▪▪ Insert the empty bottle/ cup which is used for the clean.
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: CLEAN POSITIONS
▪▪ The needle moves to its position.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys so that the needle is centred and barely touch the bottom.
▪▪ Move the needle 20steps up with { (b+{ 2 times)
Notice:
The detect z level is calculated from the reference point (330 steps higher).
150
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Buffer position
Correct position
Procedure
▪▪ Insert the empty bottle/ cup which is used for the clean.
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: CLEAN POSITIONS
▪▪ The needle moves to its position.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys so that the needle is centred and barely touch the bottom.
▪▪ Move the needle 20steps up with { (b+{ 2 times)
Notice:
The detect z level is calculated from the reference point (330 steps higher).
Predilution Positions
Correct position
Procedure
▪▪ Check if there is an empty pre-
dilution sticks inserted. REF
▪▪ Select in the menu: NEEDLE POSITION > HOME.
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: PREDILUTION
POSITIONS > ALL POSITION (DEPENDING ON REF)
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys
so that the needle is centred and the needle
barely touch the reference point.
▪▪ Press eto save the settings.
▪▪ Select in the working area: SINGLE POSITION. Pos 1
▪▪ Insert in the field POSITION the number: 40. The needle
moves to position 80. (right stick at the end)
▪▪ Check if the positioning of XY and Z axis is
OK (centered in the cups and 10 steps above
the bottom. If not, corrected the positions
and save the changes with e.
▪▪ If changes are made: Select in the working Pos 40
area: ADJUST PREDILUTION1..40 and confirm
with e. The positions 1 to 40 will
recalculate by the positions 1 and 40.
▪▪ Select in the working area: SINGLE POSITION
▪▪ Insert in the field POSITION the number: 20
press e. Verfiy the correct position.
www.biolabo.fr 151
Service manual
Operations
Plasma positions
Remark
To adjust the plasma positions you need:
▪▪ 1 sample rack Pos 1
▪▪ 1 Hitachi cup
Correct Position
▪▪ Z axis max: 20 steps above the bottom.
Procedure
▪▪ Load the plasma rack with a Hitachi cup in pos.1.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys so
that the needle is centered at the Hitachi cup
and the needle barely touch the bottom.
▪▪ Move the needle 20steps up with
{ (b+{ 2 times)
All X and Y positionsat the plasma area are
Pos 1
calculated from this position.
Check single position
▪▪ Place the Hitachi cup to position 36 (X 4)

▪▪ Select SINGLE POSITION. The cursor moves to the field
POSITION. Select here 36.
The needle moves to Position 36. Check visually if Pos 36
the needle is in the center of the cup.
If not correct the position via the navigation
keys and save the changes with e.
▪▪ If there are changes
made at position 36, select in the working area ADJUST PLASMA POS 1..36 and confirm
with e Position 1 to 36 will recalculate by the positions 1 and 36.
▪▪ Leave the working area/submenu with 3x ^.
Detect z adjustment
By using primary tube of with a length of 75mm.
The default calulation from „alldepending on REF“ is correct.
By using primary tubes a different length adapt the detect z level.
▪▪ Insert the used primary tube in position 2 of the plasma rack and insert the rack to its position in the analyzer.
▪▪ Select DETECT Z ALL (DEPENDING ON FIRST)
▪▪ The needle moves above position 1.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys ({})so that the tip of the
needle is on the same level of height like the primary tube on pos.2
152
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Manual clean position

The default position of the manaul clean position is
X2 at the plasma rack.
Correct Position
▪▪ X/Y axis: Plasma rack position X2 .
▪▪ Z axis: Max depth 1200
Procedure
▪▪ Remove all reagent racks in the
uncooled reagent area.
Pos. X2
▪▪ Remove the protection cover.
▪▪ Select in the sub menu: MANUAL CLEAN
POSITION. The needle moves to the 2rd
slot of the uncooled reagent area.
▪▪ Move the needle with the navigation keys so that the needle is visually centred left /
right in the 2rd reagent rack slot. The Z axis depth is set to 1000.
▪▪ Press ^two times to move the needle to it‘s home position. Install the protection cover
▪▪ Press e two times to move the needle back to it‘s position and check that the needle is centered in/through
the plancked. Correct the position if neccessary. If changes are made press e to save the corrected positions.
www.biolabo.fr 153
Service manual
Operations
Liquid Sensor
Notice:
Before you start the adjusting, verify the needle positions for the plasma positionX1 is set to hitachi cups.
Liquid sensor Adjustment

Correct Setting
▪▪ Needle sensor detect 350µl buffer, 250µl is not detected.
Procedure
▪▪ Prepare an Hitachi cup filled with 350µl buffer
and a second Hitachi cup with 250µl.
▪▪ Verify that the instrument tube system is filled with water.
▪▪ Select the menu: LIQUID SYSTEM.
▪▪ Select the sub menu: NEEDLE HOME.
▪▪ Select the sub menu: ADJUST LIQUID SENSOR. Insert the
prepared cup with 350µl in position X1.
▪▪ Press e
▪▪ Needle moves above plasma position X1.
▪▪ Press the button above the sampler
arm (right side of the sensor cable plug), until the LED start blinking.
▪▪ Press e. The needle move to its adjusted lowest position.
▪▪ Press the button above the sampler arm again.
▪▪ LED turn off. The sensor is adjusted.
Tests:
Sensitivity of the liquid sensor:

▪▪ Insert the prepared cup with 350µl in position X1.
▪▪ Select the sub menu: TEST SENSITIVITY OF LIQUID SENSOR.
▪▪ Press e
▪▪ The needle moves down and up and should detect the liquid. (repeat it min. 3times)
▪▪ Remove the cup and insert the cup with 250µl to position X1 at the plasma rack. Press e .
▪▪ You must receive the message “needle is dry”. . (repeat it min. 3times)
▪▪ Leave with ^ the sub menu.
Stability of the liquid sensor:

▪▪ Insert the prepared cup with 350µl in position 21. (first position of the rack)
▪▪ Select the sub menu: TEST STABILITY OF LIQUID SENSOR.
▪▪ Press e
▪▪ The needle moves up and down.
▪▪ Hit slightly with a non-conductive material (f.e. the clean stick) on the cable, the LLD
contacts and Z axis. In case of an error (detection failure) the needle stop.
▪▪ Leave the sub menu with ^.
154
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Water sensor
Correct setting
By lifting the steel insert at the plastic tube, the LED above the water sensor plug turn off when the Steel insert is
above the Water level.
Prodedure
▪▪ Please fill system once you adjust the water sensor.
▪▪ Select in the menu SENSORS.
▪▪ Remove the steel insert by pull the plastic tube and let
hang it free, without touching the metal part.
▪▪ Select in the sub menu ADJUST WATER SENSOR, press e.
▪▪ Water sensor is now adjusted.
www.biolabo.fr 155
Service manual
Operations
Temperature
Correct setting
▪▪ Reagent area: 18°C +/- 2°C
▪▪ Incubation: 40,5°C Test hole
▪▪ Measuring block: 38°C
Procedure
▪▪ Remove all cables/tubes. which are connected to the analyzer.
▪▪ Remove the left and right side cover.
▪▪ Connect the mains plug and switch on the instrument again.
▪▪ Select in the menu SENSORS > TEMPERATURE ADJUST. A chart appears
with the all temperatures. Wait until the right temp. is displayed.
▪▪ Fill the test holes (for incubation and measuring block)
with 100µl of dest. water. For the reagent area pipett
approx. 2ml of water in position 8 of the reagent block
▪▪ Place a digital thermometer in the measuring hole.
Test hole
▪▪ At the top of the PCB TBB you’ll find 3 variable resistant.
Take a Poti tool (or a small screw driver) and select the right poti to
set the temperature.
Reagent area = Poti 3
Incubation = Poti 2
Measuring block = Poti 1
To increase the temperature turn the Poti clockwise.
Test pos.
Attention! The Value at the screen will decrease!
Possible values 0-200 (This is the delay time for stopping the motor
movement in milliseconds. Consider this when changing the value.
This value should only be changed if problems occur!).
156
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Plasma barcode scanner

Correct setting:
The beam is centred in the scanner window .
Procedure
▪▪ Start the ADJUSTING program and select in the main menu COMTERM
▪▪ Cover the scanner window with a piece of paper.
▪▪ Type the commant „sZ“ in the comtern window and press e.
▪▪ To switch off the beam type: „sY“ in the
comtern window and press e.
▪▪ The beam switch on. You can see the beam on the
right cover side. In front of the reagent block.
▪▪ Cover the half of the scanner window a piece
of paper to check the beam position.
▪▪ When it‘s very close to the window frame:
▪▪ Switch the beam off.
▪▪ Remove the cover.
▪▪ Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner.
▪▪ Now you can move the scanner a little.
▪▪ re assemble the cover and re check the position.
www.biolabo.fr 157
Service manual
Operations
Measuring block paralysm

Correct setting:
The measuring block is asolutely paralel to the cuvette rack transport and in the process position to the waste cute
of the main cover
Procedure:
▪▪ Remove the main cover.
▪▪ connect the mains cable again and USB cable
▪▪ Switch on the analyzer
▪▪ Set via the adjustment srew the paralysm between the
cuvette rack transport unit and the measuring block.
▪▪ Fix the right position with the locking nut.
Screw to adjust
158
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
▪▪ Open the adjusting program

▪▪ Select the menu SENSORS>MEASURING
BLOCK PROCESS POSITION
▪▪ Set the measuring block to 90° / vertical
with the second adjustment screw.
▪▪ Fix the right position with the locking nut.
▪▪ Leave the adjusting program
▪▪ switch the analyzer off.
▪▪ Disconnect all cables and assemble the main cover.
Screw to adjust
www.biolabo.fr 159
Service manual
Operations
Configuration on GUI surface
Set time and date

This desktop icon is used to set the system time and date
Procedure:
▪▪ Double click to the icon. CONFIG
DATE TIMEon the LINUX GUI.
▪▪ Click on TIME ZONE; select your area. You can use the
search field, to find easly cour country.Summer
and wintertime is automatically changed
▪▪ Press APPLY to verify your changes.
▪▪ A window appear and request for the appropriate password.

▪▪ Confirm with OK
▪▪ Select TIME AND DATE.

▪▪ Now set the right time and date.
▪▪ A window appear and request for
the appropriate password.
▪▪ Press OK to close the window.
160
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Config Display
This desktop icon is used to adapt the screenresolution
Procedure:
▪▪ Double click to the icon CONFIG
KEYBOARD.on the LINUX GUI
▪▪ Following window appear:
▪▪ Select the the resulution which
fit for your used Monitor.
Select SAVE AS DEFAULT and after confirm with OK
www.biolabo.fr 161
Service manual
Operations
Config Keyboard
In case to use a different layout than the US layout it is
possible to config the Keyboard layout.
Procedure
▪▪ Double click to the icon CONFIG KEYBOARD on the LINUX GUI

▪▪ Select the laypout from the list and confirm with SAVE
▪▪ leave the window with QUIT.
▪▪ After the changes, reboot the PC.
Notice:
The changes are not visible. Each time you open the window, the selection
bar show s„english“
162
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Backup and restore options

Following describes all options and procedures relating backup / restore / delete data and parameter.
Backup and restore rights

Following is described all the different rights for the backup and restore options. The description of the different
content of the options are decribed separate
User/Labhead: Location:
Backup parameter Routine program
Backup database Routine program
Backup log Routine program
Service technician:
Backup parameter Maintenance program
Backup test parameter (single /all) Maintenance program
Backup database Maintenance program
Backup database (with reaction curves) Linux GUI
Backup log Maintenance program
Backup service Linux GUI
Backup needle positions Adjusting program
Restore parameter Maintenance program

Backup test parameter (single /all) Maintenance program
Restore database Linux GUI
Restore database (with reaction curves) Linux GUI
Restore needle positions Adjusting program
Delete database Linux GUI

Delete error database Linux GUI
Backup
Following describes the different data backup features of the analyzer
For all backups a FAT32 formated USB flash drive is required.
It is recommended to use a different USB flash drive than the delivered Behnk USB flash drive to avoid a delete of
the default settings.
www.biolabo.fr 163
Service manual
Operations
Backup test parameter

Backup a single test parameter
Each single test parameter can be copied from the HDD to a USB flash drive when you selct the menu item TESTS TO
USB in the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM.
Notice:
This testparameters are not restored by executing RESTORE PARAMETER at the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
Procedure
▪▪ Plug in a FAT32 formated USB flash drive to the analyzers PC
▪▪ Start the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
▪▪ Select the item TESTS TO USB
▪▪ The cursor jump to the first column. with the navigation keys yw you can select the test you want to copy.
▪▪ Press eto copy the desired test.
▪▪ The cursor jump to the second coloumn. With the navigation keys yw you can
select the position where you want to paste the test on the USB flash drive.
▪▪ Press eto paste the test.
▪▪ The message „success“ appear
Backup all test parameter
All test parameter can be copied from the HDD to a USB flash drive at once when you select the menu item ALL TESTS
TO USB in the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM.
Procedure
▪▪ Select the item ALL TESTS TO USB
▪▪ Press e.
Backup parameter
Following data are saved from the internal HDD to a USB flash drive when you select the menu item BACKUP PARAMETERS
in the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM or ROUTINE PROGRAM
▪▪ Needle positions
▪▪ Test settings (incl. the actual calibration curves)
▪▪ System parameter (all settings the item SYSTEM PARAMETERS )
▪▪ Serial number
Procedure:
▪▪ Start the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM or ROUTINE PROGRAM
▪▪ Select the item BACKUP PARAMETERS
▪▪ wait until the message SUCCESS appear
▪▪ Disconnect the USB flash drive.
164
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Backup database without reaction curves

Following data are saved from the internal HDD to a USB flash drive when you select the option BACKUP DATABASE
in the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM or ROUTINE PROGRAM without the corresponding rection curves.
▪▪ patient results
▪▪ calibrations (not the current calibration curve)
▪▪ control results with the corresponding Levey-Jennings-Graph
▪▪ error messages
Procedure
▪▪ Select the item BACKUP DATABASE
Backup database with reaction curves

Following data are saved from the internal HDD
to a USB flash drive when you select the icon “BACKUP DATABASE”
at the LINUX GUI with the rection curves.
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the icon BACKUP DATABASE
▪▪ A black window appear and request for the appropriate password.(the coursor is not moving during typing)
▪▪ The message: appear when the backup was successfull
▪▪ press e to quit (message in the window)
Backup internal protocols.

Following data are saved from the internal HDD to a USB flash drive when you select the menu item “BACKUP LOG”:
in the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM or ROUTINE PROGRAM.
▪▪ Needle position
▪▪ Test settings (incl. the actual calibration curve)
▪▪ all internal software protocols from the last 24 hours.
Notice:
This feature is used to copy all needed data to sending via mail to the manufature.
Only for troubleshooting /bug finding at the manufacture.
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the item BACKUP LOG
www.biolabo.fr 165
Service manual
Operations
Backup for service purposes

Following data are saved from the internal HDD
to a USB flash drive when you select the the icon COPY( SERVICE)
at the LINUX GUI.
▪▪ Test settings (incl. the actual calibration curve)
▪▪ all internal software protocols from the last 24 hours.
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the item COPY( SERVICE)
Restore
Following are described the different data restore options of the former created backup.
For all restore options a USBmenory with the corresponding backup is needed.
Attention:
All existing data/ settings will be over written by execute. There are no software/message warnings.
Restore a single test parameter

Each single test parameter can be copied from the USB flash drive to the HDD when you selct the menu item TESTS
FROM USB in the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM.
Procedure
▪▪ Plug in a FAT32 formated USB flash drive to the analyzers PC including the test parameter.
▪▪ Select the item TESTS FROM USB
▪▪ The cursor jump to the first column. with the navigation keys yw you can select the test you want to copy.
▪▪ Press eto copy the desired test.
▪▪ The cursor jump to the second coloumn. With the navigation keys yw you can
select the position where you want to paste the test on the USB flash drive.
▪▪ Press eto paste the test.
Restore Parameters
Following data are restored from a USB flash drive to the internal HDD when you select the option RESTORE PARAME
in the MAINTENANCE PROGRAM.
▪▪ Test settings (incl. the actual calibration curves)
166
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Notice:
To restore the needle position, use the item READ POSITIONS FROM USB STICK at the Adjusting program.
Procedure:
▪▪ Plug in a FAT32 formated USB flash drive with a corresponding backup to the analyzers PC
▪▪ Select the item RESTORE PARAME
Restore needle positions

Following data are restored from a USB flash drive to the internal HDD when you select the option READ POSITIONS FROM
USB STICK in the ADJUSTING PROGRAM>NEEDLE MANAGEMENT.
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the item READ POSITIONS FROM USB STICK
Restore database without curves

Following data are restored from a USB flash drive
to the internal HDD
when you select the icon BACKUP DB NO CURVES at the LINUX GUI
without the corresponding rection curves.
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the icon RESTORE DB NO CURVES at the LINUX GUI
Restore database with reaction curves

Following data are restored from a USB flash drive
to the internal HDD when you select the icon RESTORE DATABASE
at the LINUX GUI with the corresponding rection curves.
www.biolabo.fr 167
Service manual
Operations
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the icon RESTORE DATABASE at the LINUX GUI
Restart database
The database server PostgreSQL runs as a service in the background
to store all measuring data.
The icon RESTART DATABASE restarts this database server.
This restart is the first step if the error message
“Database memory error. No more patients can be stored [262]” occurs.
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the icon RESTART DB at the LINUX GUI
Delete database
To delete the entire database select the icon DELETE DB at the LINUX GUI.
The appropriate password is required
Following datas will deleted:
▪▪ Error messages
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the icon DELETE DB at the LINUX GUI
▪▪ The message: appear when the delete was successfull
Delete error database

To delete the entire database select the icon DELETE ERROR DB at the LINUX GUI.
The appropriate password is required
Following datas will deleted:
168
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Operations
Procedure:
▪▪ Select the icon DELETE ERROR DB at the LINUX GUI
▪▪ The message: appear when the delete was successfull
www.biolabo.fr 169
Service manual
Preventive maintenance
This chapter describes the procedures for the preventive maintanance on the analyzer.
Servicing is a preventive and continuous procedure. It is an essential contribution to the maintenance of the
product quality. All work and adjustments must be performed in accordance with the instructions / settings of the
service manuals.
All to be checked sections are described in the following chapter. The order is an recommendation and the most
efficient order. The List consist three parts and each procedure has an number in the Headline.
Table of content
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Mechanical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Functional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
www.biolabo.fr 171
Service manual
General
Minimum toolbox content:
▪▪ t 411 maintenance kit
▪▪ Thermometer
▪▪ Allen wrench: 3mm; 2,5mm; 1,5mm
▪▪ Side cutter
▪▪ Potentiometer screw driver
▪▪ 7mm wrench/ socket wrench
▪▪ CLean stick
▪▪ Pipete
▪▪ Aqua
▪▪ 0.9%NaCl
▪▪ Reagents/Controls
1.1. User
Ask customers about irregularities or problems in recent times at this instrument. (InquirySurvey)
1.2. Error database

Search in the error database in the Routine about problems/ frequently repeated error messages.
1.3. Software
Check if the latest, actual version is installed.
You find the software version in the left lower corner of the user interface or maintenance program.
1.4. Firmware
Check if the latest, actual version is installed.
You find the firmware versions in the Adjusting program at Menu: FIRMWARE > VERSIONS
172
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Mechanical
This section describes all hardware check procedures.
The software is not needed and the analyzer has to be switched off.
2.1 Accessories
2.1.1Cuvette register
Check/ assure the part is clean, free from dirt and excessive wear and tear or damages. Remove all balls
below the register if exist.
2.1.2 Sample rack

Check/ assure the part is clean, free from dirt and damages.
Check the function/conditions of the plastic springs.
2.1.3 Reagent block

Check/ assure the part is clean, free from dirt and excessive wear and tear or damages.
2.1.4 Freshwater / Waste reservoir:

Waste water reservoir: Clean if necessary with bleach to remove fungi or other dirt or exchange
the container
2.1.5 Water sensor

2.3 Liquid system

Loosen the two lock scews and open the pump drawer.
2.3.1Tube change
Change all tubes.
Note: Change one tube at time and use the old tube as model to cut the new tubes in the right length.
2.3.2 Filter change

Change all filters.
Note: Execute this procedure in combination with the tube changing.
2.3.3 Pump change

Install the new pumps.
Note the installation date on the new pumps. Execute this procedure in combination with the tube chan
ging.
2.3.4 Needle change

Change the Needle.
Change the Pipetting tube.
2.4 Reagent area
Check/assure the part is clean, free from dirt and excessive wear and tear or damages and function.
Clean the surfaces with a moistered towel.
www.biolabo.fr 173
Service manual
2.5 Wash station

2.6 Cuvette rack transport

Remove the unit for maintenance.
For easier disassembling, remove the main cover, protective guard and right front cover at once.
Remove the cuvette rack transport and the measuring block at once.
2.6.1Free wheel, tooth wheel check

Move the tooth wheel manually in both directions. The free wheel must securely lock in one direction.
2.6.2 Bearing check

Check the bearing play, compare to the others. Tighten the nut if necessary.
2.6.3 Motor support check (springs)

Pull the motors against the springs, assure a free movement.
2.6.4 Measuring block

Disassemble only if necessary. Check/assure the part is clean, free from dirt and excessive wear and tear or
damages and function.
2.6.5 Measuring chamber cleaning

Clean the chamber with the cleaning stick. Moister on one side with NaCl 0,9.
2.6.6 Horizontal alignment

Check if the measuring block is aligned to the incubator (view from the right side through the measuring
chamber.)
2.6.7 Cable check

Check plugging and conditions.

2.6.8 Magnet lifter
Check manually by lifting the upper pin.
Install the cuvette transport unit after the the checks. Install just the cuvette transport cover.
2.7 Interior/ cables

Cleaning remove all dust and foreign material in the whole Instrument.
2.8 Sampler
2.8.1 Belt check

Visual check, if there are any damages.
2.8.2 Axis check

Is there a problem with the Y-belt. Change the Y/Z axis arm complete.
2.9 Dilutor:
Cleaning only if it’s necessary! Do not grease the spindle!
Turn/open the spindle nut and close it smoothly again.
Is the dilutor damaged mechanically, change the complete dilutor.
174
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
2.10 Sample scanner

Clean the surfaces with a moistered towel
CLean the laser beam window at the scanner with a dry towel.
2.11 Covers:
Clean the covers with a moister towel.Clean the keyboard and check the function of the keyboard drawer.
For functional check reasons, do not assemble the transfer cover and the right side cover.
www.biolabo.fr 175
Service manual
Functional
3.1 Liquid system
3.1.1 Fill system

Switch on the instrument and PC, start the Adjusting Program. LIQUID SYSTEM / PRIME PUMPS.
The analyzer prime the whole system. Check if all pumps working proper
20cycles the freshwater and waste water pump fill the lower liquid circle after the the syringe and fast wash
pump is 4 times activated and fill the pipetting tube and syringe.
Check about any leakage.
After the prime cycle the probe stay above the washstation. There should no drop appear. If a drop appear,
the system is not tight.
3.2 Probe sensor
3.2.1 LLD sensor check

Select menu LIQUID SYSTEM / TEST SENSITIVITY OF LIQUID SENSOR. Prepare 350µl and 250µl NaCl 0,9% in two
Hitachi cups.
Insert in a Plasma rack. In position 1 insert the hitachi cup with 350µl. The Analyzer has to detect the liquid.
Check it 3times.
Exange the hitachi cup with the 250µl. Repeat the procedure. The analyzer should not detect the liquid.
For the detailed procedure refer to Chapter “Operations”.
3.2.2 Cable check:

Load a plasma rack. In the first position insert a Hitachi cup with 350µl NaCl 0,9%.
Select menu: LIQUID SYSTEM/ TEST STABILITY OF PROBE SENSOR.
The probe moves up and down.
Hit slightly with a non-conductive material (f.e. the clean stick) on the cable, the LLD contacts and Z axis.
In case of an error (detection failure) the probe stop.
3.3 Probe positions
3.3.1Encoder check:
Select LIQUID SYSTEM > ENCODE X/YZ. There shouldn’t be any unusual/ strange sounds or movements.
3.3.2 Position check

Check all probe positions if it’s the the right position. Re-adjust the position of the probe if necessary.
Save the positions to the USB stick (MENU PROBE MANAGEMENT).
3.4 Measuring block
3.4.1 Optics
A/D VALUES check: Menu OPTICS > A/D VALUES 620NM / 405NM :
Change LED board if the value is at 405nm >40 and at 620nm >60
3.4.2 Magnet lifter check

Menu MOTORS / CHECK MAGNET.
The magnet switches each two seconds from on to off. Check visually and by sound,if it‘s working.
3.4.3 Measuring stirring counter.

Menu MOTORS / MEASURING BALL STIRRING COUNTER. The measuring block will tip up and start the stirring unit for one
minute. At the end a message in the message box is shown with the counting turnings. Value >390 +/_40 is
ok.
176
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
3.5 Cuvette rack transport

3.5.1 Switching point:
Check: Press the tooth wheels with the finger and check via the internal LED of the sensor if the switching
point is ok.
3.5.2 Motor check

Menu MOTORS /RUNNING PERMANENTLY. Let the cuvette rack move several times through the instrument.

3.5.3 Ball sensor check
Move a cuvette rack via MOTORS over the sensor. Afterwards read via COUNT BALLS IN RACK THE COUNTER.
3.5.4 Free wheel check

Move the tooth wheel manually in both directions. The free wheel must securely lock in one direction

3.5.5 Cuvette rack test run
Check if the transport track is empty
Select the option CUVETTE RACK MOTORS/ RUNNING PERMANENTLY .
A cuvette rack is transport from the stack to the measuring block and backwarts. let the cuvette rack run
serveral times.
Replace the transfer cover when the cuvette rack transport checks are finish.
3.6 Temperatures
Temperatures has to be checked by an digital Thermometer.
When finish with the measurement remove the water from the test holes
3.6.1 Reagent area

Use a 10pos. reagent rack. Pipett approx. 2ml Water in a 16mm cup and insert in position 5.
Insert the Reagent rack in slot 2 of the cooled reagent station.
(already done at procedure 3.1.2 Probe check)
Waiting time is 10 min. before measuring. Target value 18°C +/- 2.
3.6.2 Incubation
Pipett 100µl water in the test hole, wait 1 min. before measuring.
Target: 40,5°C (+/- 0,8°C)
3.6.3 Measuring block

Pipett 100µl water in the test hole, wait 1 min. before measuring.
Target: 38°C (+/- 0,8°C)
After finish the measurements, replace the right side cover.
3.7 Sample area

Carrier check. Load a sample racks (5 st.) via the adjusting program.
3.7.1 Scanner check

Load min. 1 rack with 4 samples, turn one of the 4 samples. Check at the “Comterm” screen the correct scan.

3.7.2 Rack clamping
Insert a sample rack to pos. 1 and 5 in the pipetting area. Check the clamp via the comterm comand: “rp
CLO” = open and “rpCLC” = close.
www.biolabo.fr 177
Service manual
3.8 Reagent area

Assemble Transfer cover +right side cover afterwards.
3.8.1 Scanner check:

Insert a reagent rack with reagent bottles, partly right turned (readable barcode). Check via “Comterm”.
3.8.2 Proximity check

Insert a reagent rack in all slots one by one. Check the funtion via COMTERM.
Reagent cover switch: Press the switch. Check via COMTERM.
3.8.3 Reagent stirring check

Insert a reagent rack with an empty bottle with a stirrer at the first position. Insert the rack in each slot and
check if the stirrer is turning.
3.9 Instrument buttons

Function check
Press the buttons one by one. Check via COMTERM
3.10 Checks in routine program

3.10.1 Keypad LED check.
Scan and load racks in each slot. Check the functionallity of each LED.

3.10.2 Measuring tests
Run QC for all used Tests.
Backup parameter
Connect a USB memory to the PC. Execute at the menu RESULTS / BACKUP PARAM.
Others
Optional: Delete error database: Select at the Service Desktop the Icon DELETE ERROR DATABASE.
178
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Trouble shooting
Trouble shooting
This chapter contains a list of possible errors and the correspond solutions..
Table of content
PC and Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Dispensing and liquid system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Sample and reagent loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Cuvette rack transport System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Measuring results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
www.biolabo.fr 179
Service manual
Trouble shooting
PC and Communication
Error: No communication please restart the system
Description:
The communication between the system and pc is missing or defective.
Help:
▪▪ Check Power supply ,Fuses, cables
▪▪ Open the adjusting program
▪▪ Check firmware via Eproms
Error: unexpected reset from X/Y/Z

Description:
Communication with sub controller failed
Help:
▪▪ Update firmware via. Eproms.
▪▪ Check Power supply ,Fuses, cables.
▪▪ Check the keypad via comterm.
Error : unexpected bootloader from X/Y/Z

Description:
No firmware on the sub controller
Help:
▪▪ Update firmware via. Eproms.
▪▪ Check Power supply ,Fuses, cables.
▪▪ Check the keypad via comterm.
Error: Software Version mismatch please exit the software

Description:
Not all parts of the software are the same version.
Help:
▪▪ Reinstall software and login again.
Error: no communication (X) please restart the software

Description:
Communication error between Pc and sub controller
The system is not switched on.
The connection between the system and PC is missing or defect.
Check connections inside the system (sub controller).
Error : Interface (X) not ok. Please exit

Description:
PC interface not accessible.
Help:
▪▪ Check the interface and login again
▪▪ Restart the PC
180
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Trouble shooting
Dispensing and liquid system
Error: Sampler positioning error XXX

Description:
Error messages concerning the sampler position
repeatedly occur and the pipetting station stops.
Help:
▪▪ The axis guides are moving too heavily.
▪▪ Clean the guides.
▪▪ Check the encoder via liquid system.
▪▪ Localise which encoder is faulty and replace it.
▪▪ A drive belt is loose. Re-tighten the belt.
Error: error codes from Sampler

Help:
▪▪ E 21 Z-Achses are not in home check opto Z.
▪▪ E 22 The fast wasch pump is on during arm movement.
▪▪ E 24 One of the Axes are not in Home.Check optos
▪▪ E 51 Encoder error
Error: Dilutor position not ok

Description:
Dilutor blocks
Help:
▪▪ Check movement via liquid system.
▪▪ Check movement via liquid system without syringe.
▪▪ Check syringe.
Error: Needle Sensor

Description:
Message “Plasma/reagent not found” appears frequently.
The probe does not draw up liquid and moves up and down constantly.
Message “Wash station overflow” appears, overflow not visible.
Uninterrupted message “Plasma XX not found” or “Reagent/Clean not found”
The probe draws up neither the sample not reagent, because detection has been noted before the needle has
reached the surface of the liquid.
The probe cannot detect the surface of any liquid.
The probe does not draw up liquid and moves up and down constantly.
www.biolabo.fr 181
Service manual
Trouble shooting
Help:
The needle’s tip is too narrow.
The needle is not correctly attached to the needle guide (bad contact).
The needle is not correctly assembled.
The sensor cable is defect or the cable is not correctly fitted in the connectors.
Adjustment is not OK.
Description:
Dispensing of liquid with “Needle test” is not correct.
Help:
▪▪ The needle’s tip is too narrow. Change the positioning.
▪▪ Remove the probe and rinse with 5% hypochloride solution .Re-mount
probe. Control with menu item “Prime pumps (clean probe)”.
▪▪ Replace the needle in case this does not help.
The needle was bent and then straightened.
▪▪ The tube is not correctly attached to the needle.
▪▪ The tube is not correctly attached to the solenoid valve.
▪▪ The syringe leaks.
▪▪ Tube is possibly torn.
▪▪ The connectors on the solenoid valve leak.
▪▪ The solenoid valve leaks.
▪▪ The needle has a crack and leaks.
Description:
Message “Wash station overflow” appears
Help:
▪▪ Needle sensor not OK
▪▪ Waste pump not working,
▪▪ Waste filter is blocked.
▪▪ The waste water container has no air exit.
Description:
“Defined switching” or “No start on channel 1” (EF 25 or EF26 appears).
Help:
▪▪ The dispensing of liquid is not correct,e.g. liquid is dispensed diagonally or spirally.
182
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Trouble shooting
Description:
Probe tries repeatedly to detect liquid in the same container, moves back to home position. Repetition without stop-
ping.
Help:
▪▪ The ignoring stages are set too low in “Adjusting Sampler” (Z-detect).
Adjust so that the highest possible liquid surface level is not within this range.
Description:
“No water transport to the wash station”
Help:
▪▪ The quality of Aqua Dest. is too good. The needle sensor cannot detect the liquid surface.
▪▪ The access water pump is defective.
▪▪ The solenoid valve in the access water tube does not switch correctly.
www.biolabo.fr 183
Service manual
Trouble shooting
Cuvette rack transport system

Error : (er 273) transport of strip not OK. Please Exit
Description:
Error in the cuvette rack transport system during forward transportation.
Help:
▪▪ Open the error database and check the previous error messages.
▪▪ Open the adjusting program; check the first mistake that you find in the database.
▪▪ Transport motor, sensors.
▪▪ Check measuring block parallels
Error: (er 273) transport of strip backwards not Ok.(R_IN_ WAIT).

Description:
Error in the cuvette rack transport system during backward transportation.
Help:
▪▪ Open the adjusting program; check the first mistake that you find in the database.
▪▪ Transport motor, sensors.
▪▪ Check measuring block parallels
Error : (er 273) transport of strip not OK. Please Exit
Error: (er 315) cuvette Rack transport not OK.Remove cuvette Rack via “Maintenance”
Description:
error occur only at particial pipetted cuvette racks.
Error in the cuvette rack transport system during incubation.
Help:
▪▪ Open Maintinace and select Waste cuvette bar. (not possible)
▪▪ Open Maintinace and select withdraw cuvette bar from incubation. (not possible)
▪▪ Open Maintinace and select move manualy (not possible)
▪▪ Check measuring blocks parallels.
184
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Trouble shooting
Measuring results
Error : no clot
Description:
No coagulation detected within the measuring time 1/ measuring time 2.
Help:
▪▪ Check the Reagent.
▪▪ Check the dispensing and liquid system.
Error: Start Not ok

Description:
An expected change did not occur in the tilting process. This error is possible with channels 2-4.
Help:
▪▪ Check the needle sensor.
Error : Start not ok channel 1

Description:
An expected change in the first channel did not occur in the tilting process.
Help:
▪▪ The complete rack is rejected.
▪▪ Check the cuvette rack transport (measuring block)
Error : bad reproducibility

Description:
Bad results at fibrinogen
Help:
▪▪ Kaolin has not been shaken before use.
▪▪ Kaolin has not been stirred.
▪▪ Check the Reagent.
Error: undefined / no clot / Start Not ok / Start not ok channel 1

Description:
Measuring results are undefined.
Check the Reagent.
Help:
www.biolabo.fr 185
Service manual
Messages
Messages
This chapter describes all error flags and possible messages.
The messages are explained in general and space holder are marked with an „%“
possible space holder are described below the message description for each message.
Table of content
Result error flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
www.biolabo.fr 187
Service manual
Messages
Result error flags

See also Main Screen in routine program. F1 - help window. Here all result error flags are shown as well.
EF05 - AC pipetting timeout

A time out has occurred (e.g., no more AC reagent, or the reagent drawer has been removed) during the pipetting
process using the D-Dimer “AC” reagent. If the delay is too long, the measurements will be flagged with EF05. The
measurement will be repeated (pipetted and measured) in a new cuvette rack.
EF06 - Strip pipett. timeout

A time out occurred during the pipetting process of a cuvette rack (e.g., no more reagent, or the reagent drawer has
been removed) during the pipetting process. If the delay is too long, the measurements will be flagged with EF06.
The measurement will be repeated (pipetted and measured) in a new cuvette rack.
EF07- Plasma not found sc

After delivery of the specimen from the closed tube into the intermediary chamber of the cuvette rack, the speci-
men could not be found. Needle sensor check.
EF08 - Not enough plasma sc

After delivery of the specimen from the closed tube into the intermediary chamber of the cuvette rack, not enough
liquid could be found.
EF09 - Cup removed

Test tube was removed after the initial detection.
EF10 - Plasma not found

Not enough plasma in the primary vessel. Pipetting needle is not correctly mounted or needle adjustment is not
correct.
EF11 - Reagent not found

Not enough reagent for detection in the vessel.
Note: If a missing reagent is not replaced within 2 min., the sequence is interrupted and the tests, which do
not require this reagent, continue.
EF12 - Pipett. stop time out

The emergency stop in the device was pressed for longer than 1 minute. The device interrupted the sequence.
EF13 - Plasma rack timeout

The rotor was missing for longer than 1 minute. The device interrupted the sequence.
EF15 - Reag. rack time out

The reagent block was missing for longer than 1 minute. The device interrupted the sequence.
EF16 - Pre. posi. not free

All cuvettes for predilution have been used. This message has not been responded to within 2 minutes. Replace with
new predilution cuvette racks so work can continue.
EF17 - Pre. plas.not found

An item / series of cuvettes is missing in predilution. The metering system has assigned predilution to a free item.
Consequence: abort program, clean predilution block, fit new cuvettes, then restart.
EF18 - Barcode not readable

The bar code on the tube is not readable. Check the quality of the barcode.
EF19 - Barcode wrong

The bar code on the tube is not correct. The tube should be exchanged. Check the quality of the barcode.
188
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
EF20 - Ball bear. missing

A ball is missing in one / several cuvette/s of a rack. Automatic repetition of all tests if a ball is missing when defined
as single determination.
EF21 - Mixing motor defect

The drive motor for the magnetic stirrer, under the measuring block, is blocked.
EF22 - Check Curve

Possible with types of detection: pn/check, cpol, and apol 405nm.
▪▪ Clot: the signal is compared with a special standard. The flag is produced if a variance occurs.
▪▪ Chromogen: No large reaction flaws may occur.
▪▪ Immunological: same as chromogen and while crossing the measuring range.
EF23 - No clot
There was no coagulation detected within the measuring time 1/measuring time 2. Check the reagents; check the
pipetting system.
EF24 - Start not OK

An expected optical change did not occur in the tilting process. This can occur spontaneously, without further cau-
ses. The pipetting system might not operate perfectly. Possible with channels 2-4.
EF25 - Start not OK ch.1

Same as EF24, but with the 1st channel. Specific feature of this error: The complete rack is rejected. Check cuvette
transport.
EF26 - Threshold sign. out

Safety supervision with coagulation tests. At the instant of the “Start“- time, the measuring signal is still outside the
measuring thresholds. The measurement values are ignored and the system repeats the measurements. Possible
causes can be too small measuring volumes or a premature reaction of the specimen.
EF27 - Ignored ”Trace”

Safety supervision with coagulation tests. For this test, only a flawless coagulation signal measuring with the input
“trace“ in the test parameters is accepted. Ignored measurements are repeated automatically without this safety
supervision, but in double determination. Controls are always evaluated without this safety supervision.
EF28 - Sign. at thresh.slow

Only for PT with calculated fibrinogen. The progression of the clotting signal was too slow (possibly very low fibrino-
gen).
EF29 - Sign. at thresh. fast

Only for PT with calculated fibrinogen. The progression of the clotting signal was too fast (possibly very high fibrino-
gen).
EF30 - LED too dim

The measuring channels do not receive enough light, and perhaps they have become soiled. Clean the measuring
block with a clean stick; check optics.
EF31 - LED too bright

The measuring channels receive too much light. Liquid may have gotten into the measuring chamber. Clean measu-
ring block with a clean stick; check optics.
EF32 - Ch. x out of range <

The measuring channels receive too little light signal. Clean the measuring block with a clean stick.
A measuring channel in the measuring block is heavily soiled. Perhaps the rack has not been completely ejected and
blocks this channel in the LED test.
www.biolabo.fr 189
Service manual
Messages
EF33 - Ch. x out of range >

One measuring channel is receiving too much light signal. Too much liquid was put onto the sponge of the clean
stick when cleaning the measuring block. Solution: let the liquid in the measuring block evaporate.
EF34 - Chan. x < mean

The value of an individual channel deviates too far below the mean value.
EF35 - Chan. x > mean

The value of an individual channel deviates too far above the mean value.
EF41 - Chromo curve not OK

Reaction progress cannot be defined (elucidation rather than clouding). Check the measurement system using
hardware/LED test.
EF42 - Chromo linear < 0.94

Status only possible in tests with “chro-lin” recording of measured values. “chro-lin” = increase measurement with lin.
regression. The “CV” calculated over the 5 measured values is < 0.94. Reagent, sample or test adaptation not OK.
EF43 - Chromo polynom < 0.95

“chro-pol” = increase measurement with polynom. The “CV” calculated over the 5 measured values is
< 0.95. Reagent, sample or test adaptation is not OK.
EF44 - No signal (derived)

The reaction signal was too low or non-existent. Reaction occurred too late; possibly after the measuring time peri-
od had ended.
EF45 - Chromo result > 3.0

Reaction is too large.
EF46 - Value > meas. Time 1

The measurement time for a test is greater than the measurement time 1 programmed for this test. This is possible
if several tests with different measurement times are being measured in one rack (e.g. PT of 60 seconds + PTT of 180
seconds).
EF47 - Value > meas. Time 2

The measurement time for a test is greater than the measurement time 2 programmed for this test. This is possible
if several tests with different measurement times are being measured in one rack (e.g. PT of 60 seconds + PTT of 180
seconds).
EF48 - Value < single min

The measured value was recorded below the programmed “min entry”. Possible during clotting and chromogenic
tests. Only possible during tests done in single determination. Test is repeated.
EF49 - Value > single max

The measured value was recorded above the programmed “max entry”. Possible during clotting and chromogenic
tests. Only possible during tests done in single determination. Test is repeated.
EF50 - Duplicat. error

The two measured values of duplicate cases are outside tolerance. Sample is very non-homogeneous (especially
during PTT, thrombin time). Sample has clotted in advance. Pipetting system is not OK (condition of syringe/needle).
EF51 - Sample very dark

The sample is too cloudy. The sample is too lipaemic, hemolytic or icteric.
EF52 - Meas. point 1 not OK

Only derived Fibrinogen: The signal at the start of the reaction is not OK. Check “times“ max 1.
190
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
EF53 - Meas. point 2 not OK

Only derived Fibrinogen: The signal at the end of the reaction is not OK. Check “times“ max 2.
EF54 - Cal. CV value not OK

The measured values of a standard point are too different (only with 4 measurements per standard point).
EF55 - Noisy
Detection of an irregular (noisy) reaction path during a coagulation test:
The following items could cause this problem:
▪▪ Micro-clot
▪▪ A piece of the rubber (or cap material) is in the cuvette (when working with “cap-piercing”).
EF 55 flags the measuring value without overwriting it. With an EDP (Host) connection: The data is not automatically
sent to the host. A warning message (EP68) is displayed in the message box. It is recommended to re-check the
result. If any doubts remain, repeat the measurement.
EF59 - Repeat. dupl. error

Flag is only possible in duplicate cases once a test has been repeated. Two different flags are then produced: analyse
the sample again.
EF60 - Result < calib.range

The measured value cannot be converted into a result, because it is below the calibration curve limit. Change “min
and/or max” calibration curve limits.
EF61 - Result > calib.range

The measured value cannot be converted into a result, because it is above the calibration curve limit. Change “min
and/or max” calibration curve limits.
EF62 - Result < 0.0

The measured value is in the negative area of the calibration curve. Only possible with chromogenic tests. Sample,
reagent and/or test adaptation is not OK. Check pipetting system and needle sensor.
EF63 - Value < Q.C min.

The result of the quality check lies below the programmed confidence range.
EF64 - Value > Q.C max.

The result of the quality check lies above the programmed confidence range.
EF65 - Value < lower limit

The result lies below the programmed normal range.
EF66 - Value > upper limit

The result lies above the programmed normal range.
EF67 - Overflow res. > 9999

Calculation overrun. Change the calculation type or entries under calibration curve.
EF68 - Same results: verify

The message can be displayed when four same measuring values in one cuvette rack occur. Check if the same samp-
le is used.
EF71 - Mb Mixing Motor slow

The speed of the mixer unit under the measuring block is too low.
www.biolabo.fr 191
Service manual
Messages
EF72 - Mb pos. not up

The measuring rack is not in move-in position “upwards“. Tilt rack is restricted by swinging. Tilt motor is not working
correctly. Sensor does not recognise the correct position.
EF73 - Mb pos. not down

see EF72
192
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
Messages
Following are all Messages descibed. The %1,%2,%3 are space holder for individual words, numbers, codes.
Possible entires are described below the message explenation of the particular message.
1 %1 is not yet ready, ejecting strips

Normal status message once the routine software has been started. You must wait for the cuvette rack to eject after
the system has been restarted.
System gestartet. Riegelrauswurf läuft.
%1 - system name // defined in „System parameters“: „(a1) Name of system“
2 %1 is not yet ready

This message indicates that the system cannot be started yet. Details are also provided for the area in which it is
working. Please wait until the system has completed the process
3 %1 is working
The system is working. Details are also provided for the area in which it is working.
4 %1 ready
Normal status message the routine can be started.
System fertig mit dem Hochfahren oder einer Routine
5 %1 ready (F3, for start press first F4)

Pipetting Stop is activated by pressing of F3. Press F4 to restart.
6 %1 stopped with error. Restart with F4

An error occured, check the incident before pressing F4.
7 Stopped with F3 (arm ready: restart F4)

The system has been stopped using F3 and can be restarted using F4.
8 Stopped (arm is still working) wait for „ready“

Pipetting Stop is activated by pressing F3. The routine process will stop after pipetting the current rack. Press F4 to
restart.
9 Wait for scanning (arm is still working)

The scan button is pressed to undertake a scanning process after pipetting the current rack. Scanning process is
started automatically after pipetting the current rack.
10 Scanning in progress
Wait until the scanning process is complete.
11 (Sample prep.)
Additional information. This process is currently in opera-tion.
12 (Calibration)
13 (Quality control)
www.biolabo.fr 193
Service manual
Messages
14 (Hardware)
15 (Prime Pumps)
16 (Needle clean)
17 > %s minutes
Additional information. Gives the prospective rest time in minutes for the currently started specimens.
18 Distilled reservoir level low - refill

There is not enough water in the wash tank. You can only start the machine once you have topped up the water. If
there is ready sufficient water, the sensor may be defective. Press F4 to restart.
19 Temperature out of range (Pipetting station)

The warm-up phase can last up to one hour depending on the environmental temperature/conditions.
20 Temperature out of range (Incubation station)

21 Temperature out of range (Measuring station)

22 Temperature out of range (Reagent sta-tion)

Service message: in case reagent cooling fails. Check en-vironmental temperature.
23 Plasma block%1 is not present

The plasma rack or rotor is not in the system during routine.
%1 - „“|“left“|“right“ //““=empty (for one plasma workstation); „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
24 Reagent block%1 is not present

The reagent rack is missing or is not completely inserted.
%1 - „“|“left“|“right“ //““=empty (for one reagent work-station); „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
25 Plasma block%1 is not present (arm stopped)

The plasma block is missing or is not completely inserted.
%1 - „“|“left“|“right“ //““=empty (for one plasma workstation); „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
26 Reagent block%1 is not present (arm stopped)

The reagent block is missing or is not completely inserted.
%1 - „“|“left“|“right“ //““=empty (for one reagent work-station); „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
27 Pipetting stop is active

The pipetting process has been stopped using the stop button on the system. Press the stop button again to restart
the process. Only press the stop button if the pipetting process is to be stopped immediately. Caution: To prevent an
influence on the measurement results, a time out may occur. The tests repeated automatically.
28 Waste container not present

The container for the solid waste is not in the system. Please insert an empty waste container into the device.
29 Waste container nearly full

The container for the solid waste is almost full and must be emptied at the next opportunity. Please insert an empty
waste container into the device.
194
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
30 Waste container full

The container for the solid waste is full and must be emp-tied. Please insert an empty waste container into the de-
vice.
31 Place pre.buf. at pos.%1, plasma at %2, cups at %3

This message appears if the fully automatic calibration is to be started. Place the reference plasma in the reagent
block in the “control 1” position, corresponding empty containers (e.g. Hitachi cups) in the specified positions X (e.g.
X2..X4) in the rotor or plasma rack.
%1 - position for predilution buffer
%2 - position for reference plasma
%3 - positions for empty containers
32 Place plasma in %1, cups in %2

Place the reference plasma in the reagent block in the “X” position, corresponding empty container (e.g. Hitachi
cups) in the specified positions in the plasma rack.
%1 - position for reference plasma
%2 - positions for empty containers
33 Place predil buffer at pos.%1 and press <ENTER>

No predilution buffer at position X. Please place the predi-lution buffer at position X.
%1 - position for predilution buffer: XRC „7“; XRM „3 left“. // „left“=<global_text_15>
34 Calibration finished. Failed

The calibration curve produced is incorrect and must be repeated. Check the calibration process.
35 %1 has finished calibration. See curve

The system has completed the measurements for auto-matic calibration, for fully automatic calibration or for recali-
bration. Enter the “calibration” menu item and look at the curve.
36 Host offline
Data transfer to the Host (EDV, LIS) is not possible at the moment. Reactivate with CTRL+F5.
37 Printer offline
Print outs not possible at the moment. Check printer and reactivate with CTRL+PrintScreen.
38 System parameter not ok

The system parameters are not in order. Please check, e.g. device for host
39 Barcode parameter not ok %1 %2

The bar code parameters are not in order. Please check.
%1 - t411: „RC-Plasma“|“RC-Reagent“); Other: empty // „RC-Plasma“=<global_txt_42>; „RC-Reagent“=<global_
txt_43>
%2 - empty
40 Reagent block pa-rameter not ok

The reagent block parameters are not in order. Please check.
41 Some barcodes not readable, see Sample prep. %1

Some barcodes are not readable. Check in the menu Sample Prep. which tubes were not read.
%1 - (not readable positions)
42 Test %1 not defined for control plasma %2

A quality check is integrated in the normal routine. The test selected is not defined for this check.
%1 - test abbreviation
%2 - name of control plasma
www.biolabo.fr 195
Service manual
Messages
43 Lot No. %1 not found

Message from reagent database. Lot-No. X scanned with hand scanner does not exist. Please check the manual
entries of the Lot-No.
%1 - lot number of control plasma
44 Control plasma %1 is defined twice

Two control plasmas have the same name. Please change one of the two names. You cannot exit the program item
until you have changed the names. Caution: even blank characters are recognized as names for control plasma!
45 Up volume is too great (max. %1)

Incorrect value has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter”. After attempting to leave the menu with ESC, the
message appears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated value.
%1 - max. value
46 Down vol. for %1 pos. is too great (max. %2)

%1 - „high“ | „low“ // „high“=<global_txt_17>; „low“=<global_txt_18>
%2 - max. value
47 Down vol. for cu-vette is too great (max. %1, %2)

%1 - max. value
%2 - „single“ | „double“ // „single“=<global_txt_33>; „double“=<global_txt_34>
48 Please enter test for definition of liquid

The reagent setting of the volume table in the menu “Test parameters” has no test abbreviation. Please enter the
corresponding abbreviation.
49 Dilution volume setting %1 not de-fined

Volume setting for dilution X (e.g. 1:4) not defined. Copy files “dilu*” from param_default to param or reinstall soft-
ware.
%1 - dilution, e.g. „1:2“, „1:4“ or „1:5“
50 Derived test %1 is not possible

Incorrect test abbreviation has been entered in the menu “Test parameter”. After attempting to leave the menu
with ESC, the message appears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated
information.
51 Derived test %1 is not selected

A deactivated test abbreviation has been entered in the menu “Test parameter”. After attempting to leave the menu
with ESC, the message appears with detailed infor-mation. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated
information. Activate the test in menu “Test selection”.
52 Block %1 in working station is not yet ready

The plasma rack was removed from the system before processing was completed. Please reinsert the plasma rack.
%1 - rack key number
53 Definition of param-eter for derived test %1 not ok

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter”. After attempting to leave the menu with ESC, the
message appears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries for main test and derived test according
to the indicated information.
196
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
54 rack %1 is full, no free prep-positions

Sample prep: rack is full, scan of new samples is not possi-ble.
%1 - rack key number
55 %1 is too small (min. %2)

The calibration value is too small. It must be greater than the indicated value.
%1 - „Min. value“ | „Max. value“ // „Min. val-ue“=<global_txt_31>; „Max. value“=<global_txt_32>
%2 - indicated value
56 %1 is too great (max. %2)

The calibration value is too great. It must be less than the indicated value.
%1 - „Min. value“ | „Max. value“ // „Min. val-ue“=<global_txt_31>; „Max. value“=<global_txt_32>
57 %1 column: value is too small (min. %2)

Calibration table: the value in column left or right is too small. Enter a higher value than the indicated value.
%1 - „First“ | „Second“ // „First“=<global_txt_28>; „Sec-ond“=<global_txt_29>
58 %1 column: value is too great (max. %2)

Calibration table: the value in column left or right is too great. Enter a smaller value than the indicated value.
%1 - „First“|“Second“ // „First“=<global_txt_28>; „Sec-ond“=<global_txt_29>
59 Reference value must be greater %1

The start value in the production of calibration curves is too small. Enter a greater value than the indicated value.
60 ISI < Min. ISI value (min. %1)

The ISI value entered in the “calibration curves” menu item for production of calibration curves is too small. Enter a
greater value than the indicated value.
61 ISI > Max. ISI value (max. %1)

The ISI value entered in the “Calibration Curves” menu item for production of calibration curves is too great. Enter a
smaller value than the indicated value.
62 Value is too small (min. %1)

Incorrect value has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter” or „calibration“. After attempting to leave the menu
value.
63 Value is too great (max. %1)

Incorrect value has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter” or „calibration“. After attempting to leave the menu
value.
64 Too many tests are selected (max. %1)

In sample prep too many tests are selected for one sample. Delete one or more tests. In Maintenance “Test selection”
too many tests are selected for one reagent block. Spread the tests on multiple blocks.
www.biolabo.fr 197
Service manual
Messages
65 Reagent block not defined (max. %1)

An unspecified reagent block was selected. Check via Maintenance „System parameter“.
66 This value must be empty: end of table is %1 value

When making manual entries into the calibration table, another value below the limit value (0) has been entered.
Please delete the value entered or change the line con-taining the limit value.
67 Test %1 is not selec-ted

A requested test in not selected. Check test selection and reagent block in “Maintenance”.
68 Serial pipetting not possible

message appears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information.
69 add 1ml of 5% bleach in wash sta-tion.+ ENTER for start

When selecting the “Probe Clean” menu item in “Hard-ware”, the wash station must be filled with bleach before the
second cleaning stage. Please fill with bleach.
70 Value not ok (%1)

Incorrect value has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter” or “barcode parameter”. After attempting to leave
the menu with ESC, the message appears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries according to the
indicated value.
%1 - indicated value(s)
71 For predilution please pipett the buffer first

72 Volume setting for predilution is not ok (%1 lines)

73 Up volume of %1 must be greater 0

%1 - liquid abbreviation of buffer or plasma
74 Down volume of %1 must be 0

%1 - liquid abbreviation of buffer
75 Wash or clean in predilution %1 line not possible (must be empty)

76 Only normal pipet-ting possible

198
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
77 Incubation in predi-lution pipetting not possible (must be 0)

78 For predilution please pipett plasma in predil cuvette

79 Down vol. for predil cuv. is too small (min. %1)

80 Down vol. for predil cuv. is too great (max. %1)

81 Down volume > Up volume (%1) not possible

82 %1. line: please pi-pett predil. plasma in cuvette

%1 - line number
83 Down volume of %1 must be greater 0

%1 - liquid abbreviation of buffer, plasma or reagent e.c.
84 Up volume of pr. plasma too great (%1)

85 Pipetting of predilu-tion not possible

86 Chromogenic coa-gulation %1 not possible

%1 - indicated value „coagulation type (unit)“
87 Following test %1 is not possible

www.biolabo.fr 199
Service manual
Messages
88 Following test %1 is not selected

A deactivated test abbreviation has been entered in the menu “Test parameter”. After attempting to leave the menu
information. Activate the test in menu “Test selection”.
89 No test found with reagent %1

Menu “Run Control”.
90 Please read values for reagent %1

Menu “Run Control”.
91 Rotor%1 is not in working station %2

When pressing „Start Scan“ the rotor has not been placed in the device (error code Y). Please put the rotor in the
corresponding position.
%1 - „“|“left“|“right“ //““=empty for one reagent workstation; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
%2 - empty
92 Rotor %1 home not ok %2

When pressing „Start Scan“ the rotor has not reached the “Home position” (error code Y). Please check whether the
rotor is meshing correctly with the toothed gear or whether the bar code in the “home position” is dirty.
%1 - rotor key number
%2 - (received answer from device)
93 No patients in Rotor %1 %2
When scanning the samples, no samples were found in rotor X (errorcode Y). Please check if the barcodes on the
plasma tubes are aligned correctly and the rotor turns smoothly.
%1 - rotor key number
%2 - (rotor error code, received answer from device)
94 Patient barcode in prep. %1 is not ok %2

The Sample barcode in position X was scanned in previous scan. Before pipetting the actual scan process of this
sample X ends with an error (errorcode Y). Please check the barcodes on the plasma tubes.
%1 - rotor key number and prep. number
%2 - (rotor error code, received answer from device)
95 Rotor: parameter error %1

A rotor error occurred. Check the scanner position and adjustment via “Adjusting program”.
%1 - rotor key number: received answer from device
96 Test %1 not possible: has self depending tests

97 Test %1 is depending on test %2

98 Calibration not pos-sible: depending on test %1

200
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
99 Test %1 depending on test %2 not possible

100 Depending tests for calculation type %1

not possible Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter”. After attempting to leave the
menu with ESC, the message appears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries according to the
indicated information.
101 Pipetting liquid %1 into position %2

not possible Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter”. After attempting to leave the
menu with ESC, the message appears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries according to the
%1 - liquid abbreviation („PL“, „RE“, ....)
%2 - position: „ „, „H“, „L“, „P“, „w“ (wash)
102 Coagulation type of derived test %1 not ok

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter, detection”. After attempting to leave the menu
with ESC, the message appears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated
information.
103 Too many records selected (max.%1)

The maximum amount of data possible for printing or sending has been exceeded (maximum X). Select data accor-
ding to the indicated information.
104 Wash sequence needed

105 Wash sequence %1 in last line of table not possible (must be without ’C’)
106 Please put %1 mm cup on the washsta-tion and

press <ENTER> When selecting the “Probe check” menu item in “Hard-ware”, the wash station must be topped with
the test cup before the second stage. Please put the test cup on the washstation.
%1 - indicated value ( „30“)
107 Sample in prep. %1 not found %2

During pipetting process the sample tube at position X was removed. Please provide the sample.
%1 - rotor key number and prep. number
%2 - empty
108 Dilution %1 not possible: volume setting of plasma without dilution

Calibration: dilutions 4:1, 3:1, 2:1 not possible. Requires plasma dilution in volume setting. Check plasma pipetting in
volume table via menu „Test parameter“ or use other dilutions.
%1 - dilution, e.g. „2:1“, „3:1“ or „4:1“
109 %1 could not be mounted

The USB stick can not be recognized by the system. Re-move the USB stick and insert it again.
%1 - copy device, e.g. USB stick
www.biolabo.fr 201
Service manual
Messages
110 No tests on %1 found

No test was found on the USB stick that could be copied to the system. Copy tests on the USB and try again.
111 Device not ok (%1)

Accessing linux device X (e.g. USB stick) not possible. Check device names in profile.local.
112 Error from script %1

Internal error from copy script. Check device names in profile.local. Reinstall software.
%1 - script name
113 No %1 found (%2)

No USB stick found. Please insert the USB stick.
%2 - USB Stick count
114 Too many %1s found (%2)

Too many USB sticks (count Y) found.
Remove all USB sticks and external disks from PC and try again.
%2 - USB Stick count
115 %1 position diffe-rence too large

“Hardware/Cuvette Rack Adjust”: the tolerance of position X differences is too large. Check via adjusting/sampler
positions.
%1 - axis „X“, „Y“ or „Z“
116 %1 column: not all values ascending

The values entered in the column left/right of the calibra-tion table must be entered in ascending order to be able
to manually produce calibration curves. Please correct this value.
117 %1 column: two values are equal

Two equal values have been entered in the column left/right of the calibration table in order to manually produce
calibration curves. The values must be different. Please correct this value.
118 %1 column: not all values descending

The values entered in the column left/right of the calibra-tion table must be entered in descending order to be able
to manually produce calibration curves. Please correct this value.
119 Key permitted only in main-menu (press ESC)

The key just pressed is not permitted in the current menu. Press the ESC key to go back until you reach the main
menu. Re-select the key you pressed previously.
120 Test not available

A test for which there are no abbreviations has been en-tered in the “Sample Prep” or “Reagent Block” menu item.
Check possible abbreviations in Maintenance “Test Selec-tion”
121 Menu entrance not permitted, check calibration data via Manual, Curve
Selecting of “Calibration Curve” not possible. Create Cali-bration curve via Calibration “Manual, Curve”.
202
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
122 LED Test not possible

The LED’s cannot be tested during the current routine. Press F3 and wait until the current pipetting process is com-
plete. You can then test the LED’s in the “Hardware” menu.
123 Mixing ball(s) from cuvette is missing

There is a ball missing in the cuvette rack. The test is re-peated automatically.
124 Needle is not in Wash Position

When exiting “hardware”, the needle must be moved into the wash position. Select the “Wash Station” item.
125 Prime Pumps and Needle Clean not possible

The “Prime Pumps” and “Probe clean” menu item cannot be activated when the destilled water is empty. Refill the
water tank. Check the water sensor via Adjusting.
126 Hardware test not possible

The programs of the “Hardware” menu item cannot be selected during the routine. ??Press F3 and wait until the
current pipetting process is complete.??azl
127 Volume table for single test is empty

128 Position %1 for buffers only %2

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “Reagent Block”. After attempting to leave the menu with ESC, the
message appears. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information.
%1 - position number
%2 - empty
129 Control plasma %1 not defined

A quality check is integrated in the normal routine. This message is displayed if the control plasma has not been
defined. Change the name if you have incorrectly typed it, or delete the request.
130 Values are not ok

The Q.C. limits in the check values for high, average and low are not correct, e.g. the average value is less than the
value for low. Check and correct your entries.
131 No Curve for this calculation type

Calibration: this calculation type works without calibration curve. Check the calculation settings in menu “Test para-
meters”.
132 Clear Track not finis-hed

The “Hardware” menu item cannot be exited if the process of ejecting the rack has not been completed.
133 In the first three lines must be a right value

When manually producing the calibration curve, the values for the first three calibration points must be entered in
the calibration table. Please enter the missing values.
134 In the first two lines must be a right value

When manually producing the calibration curve, the values for the first two calibration points must be entered in
the calibration table (chromogenic tests). Please enter the missing values.
135 Normal < Min. Calib-ration value

The normal time entered in the calibration table to manu-ally and automatically produce calibration curves is too
low. Please correct your entry.
www.biolabo.fr 203
Service manual
Messages
136 Normal > Max. Calib-ration value

The normal time entered in the calibration table to manu-ally and automatically produce calibration curves is too
high. Please correct your entry.
137 Only one standard print possible

After attempting to leave the menu “system parameter” with ESC, the message appears. Please select just one type
of standard print.
138 Press <ENTER> to end the needle clean

The “Probe clean” menu item in “Hardware” can be quit after a sufficient cleaning time by pressing ENTER.
139 Volume table for duplicate test is empty

140 Please read first control plasma

When scanning control plasma data using a hand-held scanner, the message appears with detailed information.
Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information.
141 Please read first name of reagent

142 Please scan <END> for next line

143 Lot number missing

144 To register the pa-tients please press <F3> first

During the routine, you can place new samples in the rotor once the current rack has been fully pipetted.
145 SCAN permitted only in main- or plasma-prep menu

The start button is not permitted in the current menu. Press the ESC key to go back until you reach the main- or plas-
ma prep menu. Press start button again.
146 LIS communication error (already in work, or ready)

The host computer sends tests for a sample. The actual sample has been processed or is just processing. Wait until
sample processing is finished, press F6 to delete the finished tests and reactivate with F5.
147 Calculation type only duplicate test possible

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “Test pa-rameter”, calculation type rat1:2. After attempting to leave
148 Please put test cup on the washstation and press <ENTER>
When selecting the “Probe check” menu item in “Hardware”, the wash station must be topped with the test cup befo-
re the second stage. Please put the test cup on the washstation.
149 Please press <ENTER> for end of nee-dle check

The needle check is hereby ended.
204
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
150 Needle check is not finished

Press F4; follow the instructions in the message box.
151 Please remove test cup from washstation and

press <ENTER> Remove the test cup from the wash station and check the volume.
152 Please wait

Please wait until the process has been completed.
153 Error: Copy not ok

An error occurred during copying from or to USB stick.
154 First unit is not ok

155 success
Message appears after copying successfully.
156 Second parameter must be empty

157 Second parameter can be NorISI or empty

158 Second unit is not ok

159 Second print format is not ok

160 Second unit must be empty

161 Second print format must be empty

162 LIS is switched off in system parameters

When sending to the HOST with F5 it is ascertained that the communication is turned off. To work with HOST, it is
required that the communication is turned on.
163 Printer is switched off in system param-eters

When attempting to print, it was ascertained that the printer is switched off in the system parameters. To print, it is
required that the printer is switched on.
164 Please wait: copying

Message during copying data.
www.biolabo.fr 205
Service manual
Messages
165 CurISI can not be first parameter

166 Attention: you are working without Checksum

After attempting to leave the menu “system parameter” with ESC, the message appears. Ensure that a checksum on
the host connection is not necessary.
167 Error: thrombolyzer device and host device equal not possible
Check system parameter setting in maintenance. Use different devices for system and host.
168 Attention: needle drives to manual clean position,

don’t grab into work area! When selecting “Hardware/Maintenance, Probe Clean manually” the System warns with
this message. Wait until the needle is in the manual clean position.
169 Attention: wipe needle only from top to bottom!

When selecting “Hardware/Maintenance, Probe Clean manually” this message appears. Wipe the needle only from
top to bottom.
170 Liquid %1 %2 is missing %3

The reagent for a test has not been defined in the “reagent block” menu item or has not been scanned and inserted
in the reagent area. The system cannot undertake the test. Check the reagent block selection and settings. Scan the
appropriate reagent.
%1 - liquid abbreviation („PL“, „RE“, ....)
%2 - test abbreviation („A“, „B“, ....) or empty for plasma
%3 - „ „|“left“|“right“ // „“=empty for one reagent work-station; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
171 Control plasma %1 not found %s

There is no or too less control plasma. Please provide control plasma.
%1 - prep. number
%2 - ( „ „|“left“|“right“ „plasma rack“|“reagent station“ ) // „“=empty for one workstation; „left“=<global_txt_5>;
„right“=<global_txt_16> // „plasma rack“=<global_txt_35>; „reagent station“=<global_txt_53>
172 Plasma %1 not found %2

The sample has not been placed in the sample preparation system or too less liquid. The sample not found is identi-
fied by EF10.
%1 - prep. number
%2 - ( „ „|“left“|“right“|rack-key-nr „plasma rack“) // „“=empty for one workstation; „left“=<global_txt_15>;
„right“=<global_txt_16> // „plasma rack“=<global_txt_35>
173 Not enough of liquid %1 %2 (%3) (low level)

A reagent for a test will only suffice for the cuvette rack which has just been started. Please provide the reagent
needed at the corresponding position.
%1 - liquid abbreviation ( „RE“, ....)
%2 - test abbreviation („A“, „B“, ....)
%3 - prep. number „“|, „left“|, „right“ // „“=empty for one reagent workstation; „left“=<global_txt_15>;
„right“=<global_txt_16>
206
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
174 Liquid %1 %2 not found %3

All defined spaces of a reagent for test are below the “low level”. The system can no longer perform this test. Please
provide the reagent needed at the corresponding positions.
%3 - („“ |“left“|“right“ „reagent rack“) // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
// „reagent rack“=<global_txt_36>
Level check:
%1 - „“ |“left“|“right“ „reagent pos.“ // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16> //
„reagent pos.“=<global_txt_21>
%2 - prep. number
%3 - (received error answer)
175 No patient data in block %1 and %2

When pressing start no new samples ordered or no new patient data was recorded after “Scan”. Please enter the new
sample orders or provide new samples.
%1 - key number of plasma rack
176 Interface %1 not ok! Please Exit!

PC interface not accessible. Check interface and login again.
%1 - interface of device or host
177 Measuring channel %1 too dark %2

The specified measuring channel is too dark. Please clean the measuring block. Check via “Adjusting/ Optics”.
%1 - channel number
%2 - (wave length „405nm“| 620nm“)
178 Measuring channel %1 too bright %2

The specified measuring channel is too bright (chromo-genic tests). Please clean the measuring block. Check via
“Adjusting/Optics”.
%1 - channel number
179 Measuring channel %1 too dark %2 (difference to mean)

The specified measuring channel deviates too much from the other measuring channels in the dark range (chromo-
genic tests). Please clean the measuring block. Check via “Adjusting/Optics”.
%1 - channel number
180 Measuring channel %1 too bright %2 (difference to mean)

The specified measuring channel deviates too much from the other measuring channels in the bright range (chro-
mogenic tests). Please clean the measuring block. Check via “Adjusting/Optics”.
%1 - channel number
181 File %1 not found. Press F4

Missing parameter file X (e.g. sys-par.txt): restore it or recreate it and login again.
%1 - parameter file name
182 File %1 not saved. Press F4

Parameter file X (e.g. sys-par.txt) could not be written: check access rights via file manager and login again.
www.biolabo.fr 207
Service manual
Messages
183 No patient data in block %1

Only tests or only ID numbers were entered in sample prep. Enter the missing ID numbers or tests.
184 Place plasma block %1 in working station and press F2

When changing from one plasma rack to another this message appears. Please insert the plasma block.
185 Predilution rack %1 is full. Please change it

The last cuvettes were used in the predilution rack. Please change the predilution rack, so the next predilution can
be pipetted without delay.
%1 - predilution rack number
186 Calibration for test %1 is not ok, verify via Calibration, Manual, Curve
The calibration curve for one test is not OK. The current standard curve for this test must be validated. After chan-
ging the “Test parameter” this message appears and the curve must be validated, even if the test does not need a
calibration curve.
187 Version of %1 task not ok.

Not all parts of the software are of the same version. Delete previous installation, reinstall software.
%1 - task name
188 Read error in file %1. Press F4. Call Service.

Some missing fields in parameter file (e.g. sys-par.txt). Check settings in maintenance or reinstall the parameters.
189 Volume table for test %1 is not ok

Some wrong fields in parameter file for test X (e.g. test-par-00.txt). Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu
“Test parameter”. Check and correct the entries, reinstall software.
190 Predilution plasma in cuvette %1 not found

The Dilution could not be found in the predilution vial. Check whether the predilution stick is inserted and needle
sensor via “Adjusting”.
%1 - predilution cuvette number
191 Cuvette %1 for pre-dilution not free

A liquid has been detected in a predilution vial, which must be empty. Please place unused predilution vials in the
station at position X.
%1 - predilution cuvette number
192 Definition of param-eter for test %1 is not ok

Some wrong fields in parameter file for test X (e.g. test-par-00.txt). Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu
“Test parameter”. Check and correct the entries, reinstall software.
193 Definition of param-eter for following test %1 not ok

208
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
194 Rotor%1 overload (prep. %2)

Rotor blocked while routinely driving to position X. Please check whether the rotor can be turned by hand or whe-
ther the rotor is being hampered from turning by foreign bodies.
%1 - „“ | rotor key number
%2 - prep. number
195 Rotor%1 timeout (prep. %2)

During the routine, the rotor does not run correctly (driving to position X). Please check whether the rotor can be
turned by hand, or if it is blocked.
%2 - prep. number
196 Timer for liquid %1 %2 expires (prep. %2)

The onboard stability of a reagent expired. Please provide new reagent.
%3 - <prep. number> „“ |“left“|“right“ // „“=empty; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
197 ERROR on Rotor Scanner%1 %2! Please Exit!

A rotor error occurred. Note Error code for Service techni-cian. This message require the routine software to be quit
and restarted for initialize rotor. Check rotor via adjusting.
%1 - „“ | <rotor key number>
%2 - (<received error code>)
198 File %1 not found. Please exit the sys-tem!

Missing parameter file (e.g. barc-par.txt). Please restore it or recreate it.
%1 - <parameter file name>
199 Barcode in prep. %1 not readable (1st time)

The first scanning attempt for the sample position X during the routine was not successful. This message is not dis-
played on screen, but it is saved in the error database for service purposes.
%1 - „“ | <rotor_key_number> <prep_number>
200 Wrong barcode in prep. %1 (1st time)

The first scanning attempt of the sample position X during the routine was not successful. This message is not dis-
played on screen, but it is saved in the error database for service purposes.
%1 - „“ | <rotor_key_number> <prep_number>
201 Rotor error: waiting of rotor %1, answer from rotor %2! %3 Please Exit!
202 Transport of strip backwards not ok (%1) %2

An error has occurred when transporting a cuvette rack from the measuring block back to the pipetting position.
Note Motor and Error code for Service technician. This message require the routine software to be quit and re-
started! After the restart, ensure that there are no more racks in the transport channel (except the rack in Waiting
position) up to the point of rack ejection on the measuring block. If this is the case, remove them manually. Check
sensors and motors and cuvette transport via “Adjusting”.
%1 - <motor name>
%2 - (<received error answer>)
203 Error in file %1. Press F4 and check

parameters! %2 Format error in file X (e.g. sys-par.txt). Please check inter-face and login again.
%1 - <parameter file name>
%2 - empty
www.biolabo.fr 209
Service manual
Messages
204 Measuring channel %1 too dark (LEDs off) %2
205 Measuring channel %1 too bright (LEDs off) %2
206 Plasma %1 not found (sc%2)

The plasma aliquot could not be found in cuvette strip (secondary cup Y). Check needle sensor via “Adjusting”.
%1 - <prep_number>
%2 - <secondary cup number> „“ |“left“|“right“ // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>;
207 Plasma %1 not found (level sc%2, %3µl missing)

The plasma aliquot could not be found in cuvette strip (secondary cup Y). The amount in the mixing chamber (se-
condary cup) is too low. Check arm position, needle sensor and the pipetting system. Communication with SAMP-
LER not ok (X). Please exit the software
%1 - <prep_number>
%2 - <secondary cup number> „“ |“left“|“right“ // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>;
%3 - <plasma aliquot>
208 Communication with SAMPLER%1 not ok %2.

Please exit the soft-ware The communication with the specimen distributor was disturbed. Note Error code for
Service technician. This message require the routine software to be quit and re-started for initialize the sampler.
%1 - „“ |“left“|“right“ // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
209 %1 device ID mis-match %2. Please Exit!

The software does not match the hardware. (error code Y). Quit the software and restart.
%1 - subcontroller (e.g. TMC )
210 %1 with wrong hardware version %2. Please Exit!

The hardware does not match the current software. (sub-controller X). Update hardware.
%2 - ( received error code )
211 %1 with wrong software version %2. Please Exit!

The software does not match the required software version. (subcontroller X). Update subcontroller via “Adjusting”.
212 No communication %1. Please restart the system

This message can be caused by the following: The con-nection between the system and the PC is missing or defecti-
ve. The system is not switched on. Some connec-tions inside the system are not OK. Check cables (subcon-troller X).
%1 - „“ | subcontroller (e.g. TMC )
213 Barcode in prep. %1 not readable %2

During scanning bar code in position X not readable. Check the sample position in the rotor; check the quality of the
bar code.
214 Wrong barcode in prep. %1 %2

During pipetting the barcode in position X is another than scanned before. Check the sample position in rotor;
check the quality of the bar code.
215 Attention: check results and sample in prep. %1!

A result has an error flag. Check the sample, and the measurement values for plausibility. If necessary, repeat.
210
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
216 Unexpected RESET from %1!

Please restart the system Communication with subcontroller X failed. Check power supply, cables and fuses.
217 Unexpected ANSWER from %1 %2!

Please restart the system Communication with subcontroller X failed with errorcode Y.
%1 - subcontroller (e.g. TMC ) or <“Sampler“ |“Sampler left“|“Sampler right“|“Elevator“|“RC-Plasma“|“RC-Reagent“>
// „Sampler“=<global_txt_37>; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>; „Elevator“=<global_txt_38>; „ RC-
Plasma“=<global_txt_42>; „RC-Reagent“=<global_txt_43>
%2 - (<received error code>) or (<sendet com-mand>|<received data>)
218 Unexpected EVENT from %1 %2!

Please restart the system Communication with subcontroller X failed with errorcode Y.
%1 - subcontroller (e.g. TMC ) or <“Sampler“ |“Sampler left“|“Sampler right“|“Elevator“|“RC-Plasma“|“RC-Reagent“>
219 Unexpected BOOT-LOADER message

from %1 %2! Please Exit! Communication with subcontroller X failed (message Y). Update firmware of subcontroller
X via adjusting.
220 File %1 not found. Please exit the sys-tem and

call service! Missing parameter file X (e.g. sampler)
221 Error in file %1. Please exit the sys-tem and

call service! Format error in file X (e.g. sys-par.txt)
222 Position error z (1st time) in %1 %2

A sampler error on z axis occurred, which could be cor-rected. (position X). This message is not displayed on screen,
but it is saved in the error database for service purposes.
%1 - needle positions
%2 - empty
If needle position:
- plasma workstation: „ „|“left“|“right“|rack key number „plasma pos“ prep number
- reagent workstation: „ „|“left“|“right“ „reagent pos“ prep number
- predilution station: „predilution pos“ prep number
- cuvette rack: „ „|“left“|“right“ „cuvette“ „high“|“low“|“s.c.“ prep number
- clean position: „ „|“left“|“right“ „clean pos.“ prep number
- wash position: „ „|“left“|“right“ „wash position.“
- test position: „ „|“left“|“right“ „test position.“
- cuvette rack reference: „ „|“left“|“right“ „strip reference pos.“
/ „“=empty; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
/ „plasma pos“=<global_txt_20>
/ „reagent pos“=<global_txt_21>
/ „predilution pos“=<global_txt_22>
/ „cuvette“=<global_txt_23>
/ „high“=<global_txt_17> / „low“=<global_txt_18> / „s.c.“=<global_txt_19>
/ „clean pos.“=<global text line 24>
/ „wash position“=<global_txt_25>
/ „test position“=<global_txt_26>
/ „strip reference pos.“=<global_txt_27>
www.biolabo.fr 211
Service manual
Messages
223 ATTENTION: arm z position not ok in %1 %2

A sampler error occurred, which could not be corrected automatically (position X). Press F4. The arm must now
move to its “Home Position” and then drive to the correct position. Should this error occur frequently, check via
adjusting.
%2 - empty
If needle position:
224 Rotor%1 position error %2 (1st time)

A rotor positioning error occurred, which could be cor-rected (position X). This message is not displayed on screen,
but it is saved in the error database for service purposes.
225 Rotor%1 position error %2. Press F4

A rotor positioning error occurred, which could not be corrected automatically (position X). Press F4. The rotor must
now move to its “Home Position” and then drive to the correct position. Should this error occur frequently, check via
adjusting rotor.
226 Rotor%1 reflector foil not found %2!

Please check, press F4, SCAN A rotor positioning error occurred during initializ-ing/scanning procedure. Check
position of reflector foil. Press o. The rotor must now move to its “Home Position”. Should this error occur frequently,
check via adjusting rotor.
%1 - ( rotor key number )
227 Error on Baseboard %1. Please Exit!

An error on the baseboard (power supply etc.) occurred. Check power supply, cables and fuses.
%1 - „(Power Main Fail, received error code )“ | „(Power Second Fail, received error code )“ | „(a Fuse is gone, re-ceived
error code )“
212
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
228 Position error x/y (1st time) in %1

A sampler error on x/y axis occurred, which could be cor-rected (position
X). This message is not displayed on screen, but it is saved in the error database for service purposes.
If needle position:
229 ATTENTION: arm x/y position not ok in %1 %2

A sampler error on x/y axis occurred, which could not be corrected automatically (position X). Press F4. The arm
must now move to its “Home Position” and then drive to the correct position. Should this error occur frequently,
check via adjusting.
%2 - empty
If needle position:
230 Printer not ready

Check status of printer. Check connection. Reactivate printer with CTRL+PRTSC.
231 No communication. Please restart the system %1

The communication between the system and PC is missing or defective. Check power supply, cables and fuses.
%1 - „“ || ( received error code )
www.biolabo.fr 213
Service manual
Messages
232 Wash station over-flow %1

There is an overflow in the wash station. Press F4. If the message appears again, please exit the routine. The mes-
sage suggests a defective waste water pump or a blocked waste water filter.
%1 - ( „“ | „left“ | „right“) // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
233 No water in wash station %1

There is no water in the wash station. Press F4. If the mes-sage appears again, please exit the routine. The message
suggests a defective fresh water pump, a blocked fresh water filter or a defective fresh water valve.
234 Needle Cleaner not found %1 %2

The Clean is too less. Refill the Clean. In “Hardware/Probe clean” no bleach has been filled in the wash station for the
probe cleaning function. Please add the bleach.
%2 - „(clean)“
235 Water pressure too low: call service
236 Cuvette holder emp-ty (sensor not ok) %1

There are no more cuvette racks in the cuvette register or any racks have jammed. Please refill with cuvette racks
and ensure that the racks are loose.
%1 - empty
237 Check cuvette posi-tion at pipetting station %1 %2

Check the position of the rack in the pipetting station. If the error reoccurs, check the sensors and motors via “Ad-
justing”.
%1 - empty
%2 - empty
238 Calibration curve failed

The process of automatically producing a calibration curve could not be completed successfully. If you have allowed
a protocol to be printed, you can view the individual values of duplicate cases. Otherwise, the values can be read off
the “process check”. Enter the values manually in the calibration curve or repeat the process of automatically produ-
cing a calibration curve.
239 Chromogenic tests not possible

240 LEDs too dark %1

The LEDs are too dark or the measuring block is dirty. Clean the measuring block; check optics via “Adjusting”.
241 LEDs too bright %1

The LEDs are too bright. Check optics via “Adjusting”.
242 LEDs ok %1
The LEDs are OK. The message appears once the lamp has been checked in the “Hardware“ menu “LED Test“.
%1 - ( received value)
243 LEDs will fail soon %1 (call service)

Check via “Adjusting” / “Optics”; clean measuring block.
%1 - ( „405nm“|“620nm“: received error code ) // wave length „405nm“| „620nm“
214
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
244 Predilution buffer not found %1

There is no buffer liquid detected during predilution for fully automatic calibration.
%1 - predilution prep number „“ |“left“|“right“ // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_
txt_16>
245 Measuring block not in incu. position %1

The measuring block has not moved all the way to the entry position (horizontal). Check the cuvette rack transport
area.
246 Measuring block not in meas. position %1

The measuring block does not move completely into the measuring position (vertically). Check the cuvette rack
transport area.
247 Cuvette rack empty, please refill %1

There are no more cuvette racks in the cuvette register or any racks have jammed. Please refill with cuvette racks
and ensure that the racks are loose. //_OVERLOAD //_WAIT_NO_STRIP
248 Cuvette transport error (pipette pos.) %1 %2

An error has occurred at the pipetting position during rack transport. Note Motor and Error code for Service tech-
nician. This message require the routine software to be quit and restarted! After the restart, ensure that there are
no more racks in the transport channel (except the rack in Waiting position) up to the point of rack ejection on the
measuring block. If this is the case, remove them manually. Check sensors and motors via “Adjusting”. //_OVERLOAD
%1 - „“|“left“|“right“ // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
249 Cuvette transport error (1st incub.pos.) %1 %2

An error has occurred at the “Incubation 1” position during rack transport. Note Motor and Error code for Service
technician. This message require the routine software to be quit and restarted! After the restart, ensure that there
are no more racks in the transport channel (except the rack in Waiting position) up to the point of rack ejection on
the measuring block. If this is the case, remove them manually. Check sensors and motors via “Adjusting”. //_OVER-
LOAD
%2 - empty
250 Cuvette transport error (2nd incub.pos.) %1 %2

LOAD
%2 - empty
251 Cuvette transport error (3rd incub.pos.) %1 %2

LOAD
%2 - empty
www.biolabo.fr 215
Service manual
Messages
252 Cuvette transport error (meas. block) %1 %2

An error has occurred at the “measuring block” position during rack transport. Note Motor and Error code for Service
technician. Check rack ejection on the measuring block and empty the waste container. This message require the
routine software to be quit and restarted! After the restart, ensure that there are no more racks in the transport
channel (except the rack in Waiting position) up to the point of rack ejection on the measuring block. If this is the
case, remove them manually. Check sensors and motors via “Adjusting”. //_OVERLOAD
%2 - empty
253 Cuvette transport error (< 2 ) %1

An error has occurred when transporting the rack into the measuring block. Note Motor and Error code for Service
the measuring block. If this is the case, remove them manually. Check sensors and motors via “Adjusting”. //_MBL_
OCCUPIED
254 Cuvette jam in measuring block (press F4) %1

An error has occurred during ejection out of the measuring block. Note Motor and Error code for Service technician.
This message require the routine software to be quit and restarted! After the restart, ensure that there are no more
racks in the transport channel (except the rack in Waiting position) up to the point of rack ejection on the measuring
block. If this is the case, remove them manually. Check sensors and motors via “Adjusting”. //_OVERLOAD
%1 -(<received error code>)
255 Calibration plasma not found %1

One of the Calibration vials or the Reference plasma con-tains no plasma or insufficient plasma.
%1 - ( <rack type> <““|“left“|“right“> <prep.number> )
// <rack type> behnk dev.: „plasma rack“=<global_txt_35>
// <rack type> roche dev.: „reagent pos.“=<global_txt_21>
// <““ |“left“|“right“>: „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
256 Not enough needle cleaner %1 (low level)

The probe cleaner is nearly empty. Provide cleaner.
%1 - <““|prep.number> <““|“left“|“right“>
// behnk dev.: „“= empty
// roche dev.: prep.number
// <““ |“left“|“right“>: „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
257 L.I.S communication error

There is some error in the link to the host computer. The system cannot transmit its results or receive its tests au-
tomatically. Once the routine has been quit, you can high-light the data measured in the “Result” menu item and
transmit it to the host computer. Reactivate LIS communi-cation with CTRL+F5.
258 Cuvette position error (%1 sen.):

stop testing %2 The rack has not reached the pipetting position correctly. This message require the routine soft-
ware to be quit and restarted! After the restart, ensure that there are no more racks in the transport channel (except
the rack in Waiting position) up to the point of rack ejection on the measuring block. If this is the case, remove them
manually. Check sensors, motors and the magnetic lifter via “Adjusting”.
259 Cuvette position error (meas.Blck>16): stop testing %1

No rack has arrived in the measuring block within the time specified. This message require the routine software to
be quit and restarted! After the restart, ensure that there are no more racks in the transport channel (except the rack
in Waiting position) up to the point of rack ejection on the measuring block. If this is the case, remove them manu-
ally. Check sensors, motors and the magnetic lifter via “Ad-justing”.
216
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
260 Software version mismatch.

Please exit the soft-ware. Not all parts of the software are of the same version. Please reinstall software and login
again.
261 Liquid level sensing error %1 %2

The needle sensor is not stable. Please check if the needle is mounted correctly and check sensor via “Adjusting”. This
message is not displayed on screen, but it is saved in the error database for service purposes.
%1 - <““ |“left“|“right“> // „“=empty for one sampler; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
%2 - empty
262 Database memory error. No more pa-tients can be stored

Make sure that no unauthorized characters sent from the host. Restart database, restore database or delete databa-
se.
263 LEDs fail
264 LEDs unstable
265 LEDs fail. Please Exit!

The LEDs are defective. Replace the photometer LED board.
266 LEDs unstable. Please Exit!
267 %1 rotor not defined

The rotor is not defined. Check System parameter via “Maintenance”.
%1 - <“Left“|“Right“> // „Left“=<global_txt_28>; „Right“=<global_txt_29>
268 Incubation type not ok. Please Exit! %1

Check connection of incubation. Check version of incuba-tion.
%1 - empty
269 Measuring block: no strip arrived %1 %2

An interruption has occurred while transporting the rack within the incubation, and the rack has not reached the
measuring block. Check if the rack has jammed in the incubation or a transport motor in the incubation is defec-tive.
See message 273.
%2 - empty
270 Measuring block: motor defect %1 %2

The rack was detected by the flow sensor of the transport motor in the measuring block, but there was no optical
change (dark) at channel 4. The transport motor in the measuring block is defective. See message 273.
%2 - empty
271 Measuring block: LEDs fail %1

After measuring the rack was transported out of the measuring block to the solid waste but there was no optical
signal (bright) at channel 4. Check whether the solid waste container is full so the rack can not ejected. Check optics
via Adjusting. See message 273.
272 Strip backwards wait position not arrived %1 %2

Transport was interrupted when transporting the rack back into its wait position. The rack did not reach the wait
position. Check transport motors and sensors in the incu-bation via Adjusting. See message 273.
%2 - empty
www.biolabo.fr 217
Service manual
Messages
273 Transport of strips not ok. Please Exit! %1

The previous four error messages lead to this message if F4 is pressed. Quit the program and restart it. A red warning
window appears in the working area of the program. Follow the instructions provided in this warning window. Note
the following in the warning window: A: Always wait until the “system ready” message appears in the message box.
B: Correctly enter the password and confirm by pressing ENTER.
%1 - (<received error code>) or empty
274 Transport of strips not ok: accepted

If the red warning window has been correctly confirmed, this message only appears in the database. If the red win-
dow reappears after several restarts, check transport motors via “Adjusting”.
275 Needle sensor %1 unstable (1st time)

The needle sensor could not calibrate itself when first searching for liquids. A second attempt is undertaken automa-
tically. This message is not displayed on screen, but it is saved in the error database for service purposes.
276 Needle sensor %1 unstable, please check

During the second calibration, the needle sensor is still not in the working area and cannot detect any liquid. Check
if the needle is not mounted correctly. Check if the sensor cable is defective or not mounted correctly and check
sensor via “Adjusting”.
277 ATTENTION: dilutor position not ok.

Please Exit!
The dilutor cannot correctly guide the syringe. The encoder has, therefore, created an error message. The main
menu must be quit and restarted. Please use only the original dilutor syringe greased with silicon. Check the Dilutor
for mechanical or electrical malfunktion via “Adjusting”.
278 Measuring block not in incu. position.

Please Exit! %1
Quit the routine and restart the system. Check the meas-uring module, waste container and cuvette ejection.
279 %1: unknown EVENT from %2! %3

Communication problems between the system modules and the PC. Quit the software and restart. Update the mo-
dule via “Adjusting”.
%1 - task name
%2 - subcontroller (e.g. TMC, TBC )
%3 - (<received data>)
280 %1: unknown ANS-WER from %2! %3

%1 - task name
%2 - subcontroller (e.g. RMC, TSC )
281 %1: wrong ANSWER received! %2

%1 - <“Sampler“ |“Sampler left“|“Sampler right“|“Elevator“|“RC-Plasma“|“RC-Reagent“>
%2 - (<sendet command>|<received data>)
218
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
282 %1: undefined AN-SWER received! %2

283 %1: command AN-SWER missing! %2

284 %1: wrong EVENT received! %2

285 %1: undefined EVENT received! %2

286 %1: command EVENT missing! %2

287 %1: too many EVENTs! %2

288 %1: unexpected end of command re-ceived! %2

www.biolabo.fr 219
Service manual
Messages
289 %1: end of command not received! %2

290 %1: busy error! %2

291 %1: encoder%2 error at STOP! %3

A sampler positioning error (X-, Y- or Z-Axis) occurred. The sampler must now move to its “Home Position” and then
drive to the correct position. Should this error occur fre-quently, check axles and Sampler encoder via adjusting
Liquid system. <<< fehlt für elevator azl
%1 - <“Sampler“ |“Sampler left“|“Sampler right“|“Elevator“|“Elevator< motor name>“||“Motor < motor name>“ >
// „Sampler“=<global_txt_37>; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>; „Elevator“=<global_txt_38>;
„Motor“=<global_txt_41>
%2 - <“ X“|“ Y“|“ Z“|“ W“|““Elevator“>
292 %1: encoder%2 positioning error! %3

%1 - <“Sampler“ |“Sampler left“|“Sampler right“|“Elevator“|“Elevator< motor name>“|“Motor < motor name>“ >
„Motor“=<global_txt_41>
%2 - <“ X“|“ Y“|“ Z“|“ W“|““Elevator“>
293 %1: encoder error%2 was not in home! %3

„Motor“=<global_txt_41>;
%2 - <“ X“|“ Y“|“ Z“|“ W“|““Elevator“|““>
294 %1: encoder posi-tioning error%2 not in home! %3

Liquid system.
%1 - <“Sampler“ |“Sampler left“|“Sampler right“> // „Sam-pler“=<global_txt_37>; „left“=<global_txt_15>;
„right“=<global_txt_16>;
%2 - <“ X“|“ Y“|“ Z“|“ W“>
220
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
295 %1: encoder error timeout at driving%2! %3

„Motor“=<global_txt_41>;
%2 - <“ X“|“ Y“|“ Z“|“ W“|““Elevator“|““>
296 %1: error at needle tuning! %2

Check the needle fixture. Check cables and electronics. Readjust the needle sensor via “Adjusting”.
297 %1: error finger found! %2

The needle sensor detects too early. Check the needle fixture. Check the cables, readjust the needle sensor, check
the needle position via “Adjusting”.
298 %1: unknown error! %2

Communication problems between the system modules and the PC. Quit the software and restart.
299 ANSWER from %1: parameter error in command %2! %3

%2 - <sendet command>
300 ANSWER from %1: unknown command %2! %3

%2 - <sendet command>
301 %1: all floors are free! %2

An error has occurred during movement of the cuvette rack. Quit the software and restart. This message require
the routine software to be quit and restarted! After the restart, ensure that there are no more racks in the transport
case, remove them manually. Check sensors and motors via “Adjusting”.
%1 - <“Motor < motor name> (Elevator)“ > // „Eleva-tor“=<global_txt_38>; „Motor“=<global_txt_41>;
www.biolabo.fr 221
Service manual
Messages
302 %1: all floors are occupied! %2

%1 - <“Motor < motor name> (Elevator)“ > // „Eleva-tor“=<global_txt_38>; „Motor“=<global_txt_41>; %2 - (<recei-
ved error code>)
303 %1: no strip in floor%2! %3

%1 - <“Motor < motor name> (Elevator)“ > // „Eleva-tor“=<global_txt_38>; „Motor“=<global_txt_41>; %2 - emp-
ty%3 - (<received error code>)
304 %1: driving to floor%s! %2 --- not more used ---

%1 - <“Motor < motor name> (Elevator)“ > // „Eleva-tor“=<global_txt_38>; „Motor“=<global_txt_41>;
%2 - <floor number>
305 %1: motor timeout! %2

ved error code>)
306 %1: motor overload! %2

ved error code>)
307 Waste open! %1
308 Waste closed! %1
309 %1 with wrong de-vice mode %2. Please Exit!

%1 - subcontroller (e.g. TMC. RMC, TSC )
%2 - (<error device mode>)
310 LIS is enabled via LAN

In „Maintenance“ System parameters menu item „Host communication“ LAN has been selected. Transfer Data via F5
is not possible, the F5 key is not active.
311 Sampler%1: needle not ok! Please restart the system and check the needle via ‚Nee-dle check‘
The plasma aliquot could not be found in cuvette rack. The amount in the mixing chamber (secondary cup) is too
low. This situation indicates the instrument that the needle is blocked, and the measurement is stopped. Check
needle, needle fixture and cable. Check the pipetting system and arm position. Check needle sensor via „Adjusting“.
222
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
312 Sampler%1: error at driving X/Y, restricted area! %2

Unable to reach the defined position in time. Movement interrupted. Check sampler position via “Adjusting”.
313 Sampler%1: error at driving X/Y, wash pumps on! %2

Movement interrupted. Quit and restart the software.
314 Cuvette rack transport error into incubation! %1

An error has occurred during rack transport. This message require the routine software to be quit and restarted!
After the restart, ensure that there are no more racks in the transport channel (except the rack in Waiting position)
up to the point of rack ejection on the measuring block. If this is the case, remove them manually. Check sensors and
motors via “Adjusting”.
315 Cuvette rack transport not ok.

Remove cuvette rack via Hard-ware/Elevator %1
An error has occurred during rack transport. Select “Waste cuvette bar” in the menu item “Maintenance, Incubator”. If
the analyzer does not eject the cuvette bar try “Withdraw cuvette bar from incubator”. The analyzer attemps to move
the cuvette bar out of the Incubator. Remove the cuvette bar from the analyzer. This message require the routine
software to be quit and restarted! After the restart, ensure that there are no more racks in the transport channel (ex-
cept the rack in Waiting position) up to the point of rack ejection on the measuring block. If this is the case, remove
them manually. Check sensors and motors via “Adjusting”.
316 Elevator is not in ‚Home‘ position

Please drive the elevator in home position.
317 Cuvette rack transport backwards into incubation (2nd try) %1

An error has occurred during rack transport, which could be corrected. This message is not displayed on screen, but
it is saved in the error database for service purposes. Check sensors and motors via “Adjusting”.
318 Calibration or liquid validation for test %1 not ok: verify via Calibration
The calibration curve for one test is not OK. The current standard curve for this test must be validated. After chan-
ging the “Test parameter” this message appears and the curve must be validated, even if the test does not need a
calibration curve.
%1 - <test abbreviation („A“, „B“, ....)>
319 Volume Setting must start with BU or PL

320 %1 error driving %2 %3 is not in ‚home‘ position %4

When testing the sample rack transport in the Adjusting program the transport driver must be in home position.
Please press “All Home” first. ???azl
%1 - <“RC-Plasma“> // „ RC-Plasma“=<global_txt_42>
%2 - <“insertion“|“scan“> // „insertion“=<global_txt_48>, „scan“=<global_txt_49>
%3 - <“scan“|“pipett“> // „scan“=<global_txt_49>; „pi-pett“=<global_txt_50>
www.biolabo.fr 223
Service manual
Messages
321 %1 error driving %2 home first %3

When testing the sample rack transport in the Adjusting program the transport driver must be in home position.
Please press “All Home” first.???azl
%2 - <“insertion“|“scan“|“pipett“> // „inser-tion“=<global_txt_48>, „scan“=<global_txt_49>; „pi-pett“=<global_
txt_50>
322 %1 error driving %2 timeout %3

A sample rack transport error occurred. Check the sample rack transport area for jammed racks.
txt_50>
323 %1 error driving %2 overload %3

txt_50>
324 %1 rack ID is empty %2

The sample rack ID is not readable. Please check the sample rack barcode.
%1 - <“RC-Plasma“|“RC-Reagent“> // „ RC-Plasma“=<global_txt_42>; „ RC-Reagent“=<global_txt_43>
325 %1 rack ID is not readable %2

326 %1 rack ID is not ok (length) %2

327 %1 rack ID is not ok (checksum) %2

328 %1 rack ID is not ok (second character must be 0) %2

329 %1 rack ID is not ok (range: %2) %3

%2 - <min.value>...<max. value>
224
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
330 %1 error driving %2 %3

%2 - <“insertion“|“scan“|“pipett“|“tray“> // „inser-tion“=<global_txt_48>, „scan“=<global_txt_49>; „pi-
pett“=<global_txt_50>; „tray“=<global_txt_52>
331 %1 rack ID is not ok

(allowed char. ‚0‘..‘9‘, ‚A‘..‘F‘) %2
%1 - <“RC-Reagent“:> // „RC-Reagent“=<global_txt_43>
332 %1 position %2 barcode is not read-able %3

The barcode in one position of the reagent rack has not been scanned successfully. Please check the reagent bar-
code.
%2 - <prep. number>
333 %1 position %2 barcode is not ok (length) %3

The barcode in one position of the reagent rack has not been scanned successfully. Please check the barcode para-
meters in “Maintenance”.
%2 - <prep. number>
334 %1 position %2 barcode is not ok (checksum) %3

%2 - <prep. number>
335 %1 position %2 barcode is not ok

(allowed char. ‚1‘..‘8‘) %3 The barcode in one position of the reagent rack has not been scanned successfully. Please
check the barcode parameters in “Maintenance”.
%2 - <prep. number>
336 %1 position %2 barcode is not ok

(month too great) %3 The barcode in one position of the reagent rack has not been scanned successfully. Please
check the barcode parameters in “Maintenance”.
%2 - <prep. number>
337 %1 position %2 barcode is not ok (year too great) %3

%2 - <prep. number>
www.biolabo.fr 225
Service manual
Messages
338 Liquid not ok: ab-breviation of liquid is empty %1

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “reagent set up”, “calibration set up” or “QC set up”. After leaving the
menu with ESC, the message appears with detailed information. When re-calling the menu, the cursor goes to the
position of incorrect entry. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information.
%1 - empty
339 Liquid not ok: test of liquid is empty %1

%1 - empty
340 Liquid not ok: name of liquid is empty %1

%1 - empty
341 Liquid not ok: manu-facturer is empty %1

%1 - empty
342 Liquid not ok: type is empty %1

%1 - empty
343 Liquid not ok: liquid Id is empty %1

%1 - empty
344 Liquid %1: manufac-turer is already de-fined as %2

%1 - <name of liquid> // e.g. name of control plasma, „BU A“
%2 - <indicated value>
345 Liquid %1: type is already defined as %2

position of incorrect en
346 Liquid %1: liquid Id is already defined as %2

226
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
347 Test %1: liquid %2 %3 is not defined

position of incorrect entry. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information. The re-quested
liquid is defined in pipetting table, but not in „..set up“.
%1 - <test abbreviation> // e.g. „A“, „B“, ....
%2 - <liquid abbreviation> // e.g. „RE“, „AC“
%3 - <liquid test abbreviation> // e.g. „A“, „B“, ....
348 Liquid %1: manufac-turer %2 is already defined for %3

%1 - <name of liquid> // e.g. „RE A“, „BU“, „BU A“, „cl“
%3 - <name of liquid> // e.g. RE A“, „BU“, „BU A“, „cl“
349 Liquid %1: type %2 is already defined for %3

350 Liquid %1: liquid Id %2 is already defined for %3

351 Reagent setup for test %1 not ok %2

%1 - <test abbreviation> // e.g. „A“, „B“, ...
%2 - empty
352 Reagent setup not ok. Please exit!

353 %1 only one type allowed %2 %3

--- not more used ---
Scanning of reagent rack: the barcodes are not from one type.
%2 - (<indicated value>)
%3 - empty
www.biolabo.fr 227
Service manual
Messages
354 %1 different lot no. for the same liquid not allowed
%1 - <“Test“> <test abbreviation>“ :“ // „Test“=<global_txt_56>; test abbreviation, e.g. „A“, „B“, ...
355 %1 position %2 reagent is not de-fined %3

An unknown reagent has been scanned and inserted. Please define the reagent in the menu “reagent set up”.
%2 - <prep. number>
%3 - empty
356 %1 position %2 control plasma is not defined %3

An unknown control plasma has been scanned and in-serted. Please define the QC in the menu “QC set up”.
%2 - <prep. number>
%3 - empty
357 %1 position %2 calibration plasma is not defined %3

An unknown calibration plasma has been scanned and inserted. Please define the calibration plasma in the menu
“calibration set up”.
%2 - <prep. number>
%3 - empty
358 %1 position %2 date expired, bottle not usable

An expired reagent has been scanned and inserted. The reagent will be used but all results are flagged (EF81).
%2 - <prep. number>
359 Reagent setup for universal liquids not ok

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “reagent set up”. After leaving the menu with ESC, the message ap-
pears with detailed information. When re-calling the menu, the cursor goes to the position of incorrect entry. Check
and correct the entries according to the indicated information.
360 %1 position %2 %3 must be mixed: place in mixed position, please

A stirred required reagent has been placed in a unmixed position. Place on a mixed position.
%2 - <prep. number>
361 %1 position %2 %3 must be cooled: place in cooled position, please

A cooled required reagent has been placed in the uncooled reagent area. Place in the cooled reagent area.
%2 - <prep. number>
362 %1 position %2 %3 must be not cooled: place in not cooled position, please
An uncooled required reagent has been placed in the cooled reagent area. Place in the uncooled reagent area
%2 - <prep. number>
%3 - <name of liquid> // empty or name of liquid, e.g. name of calibration or control plasma
363 Password ok
The password has been accepted.
228
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
364 Password not ok

The password has not been accepted. Enter the right password.
365 Passwords not ok (one or both empty)

The password has not been accepted. Enter the right password two times.
366 Passwords not ok (different)

The password has not been accepted. Enter the right password two times.
367 Calibration setup for test %1 not ok %2

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “calibration set up”. After leaving the menu with ESC, the message
appears with detailed information. When re-calling the menu, the cursor goes to the position of incorrect entry.
%2 - empty or „( <number> <liquid abbreviation> )“| „( <liquid abbreviation> )“ // liquid abbreviation „PL“, „BU“
368 Calibration setup not ok. Please exit!

369 Liquid not ok: type %1 not possible %2

--- not more used ---
Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “reagent set up”. After leaving the menu with ESC, the message ap-
pears with detailed information. When re-calling the menu, the cursor goes to the position of incorrect entry. Check
and correct the entries according to the indicated information.
370 Probe rack tray open %1 --- not more used ---
The rack output is open. Please press the rack output button again to close.
%1 - empty
371 Probe rack tray closed %1 --- not more used ---
The rack output is closed. The routine can be started.
%1 - empty
372 Probe rack tray nearly full %1

The sample output buffer is nearly full. Dispose of soon the finished racks.
373 Probe rack tray full %1

The sample output buffer is full. Dispose of the finished racks.
374 Reagent cover is not present %1

The reagent cover is not on the reagent area. Put the cover on the reagent area.
%1 - empty
375 Reagent cover is not present (arm stopped) %1

The reagent cover is not on the reagent area. Put the cover on the reagent area.
%1 - empty
www.biolabo.fr 229
Service manual
Messages
376 %1 position %2 with new pseq. %3 for liquid %4

A new reagent, calibration plasma or control plasma (new PSN) has been scanned and inserted. Check the package
insert whether it has to be calibrated and for the new reference values.
%2 - <prep. number>
377 %1 error driving %2 %3. Please exit!

%2 - <“insertion“|“scan“|“pipett“|“tray“> // „inser-tion“=<global_txt_48>, „scan“=<global_txt_49>; „pi-
pett“=<global_txt_50>; „tray“=<global_txt_52>
378 Scan ‚%1 rack‘ with empty cups in pos. %2 and insert in %3 reagent station
After “Start Calibration” the system informs, how many calibration vials for the dilutions in which positions are requi-
red and in “Maitenance/Check volume” for the dis-pensed liquid. Insert the specified vials in the rack, scan and load
the rack in the reagent slot.
%1 - <“8 / 10“|“10“> // rack type
%2 - <indicated position(s)> // e.g „3..5“
%3 - <““ |“left“> // „“=empty for one reagent station; „left“=<global_txt_15>
379 Scan ‚%1 rack‘ with plasma dilutions in pos. %2 and insert in %3 reagent station
After “Start Calibration” the system informs, how many calibration vials for the dilutions in which positions are requi-
red. Insert the specified vials in the rack, scan and load the rack in the reagent slot.
%1 - <“8 / 10“|“10“> // rack type
%2 - <indicated position(s)> // e.g „3..5“
%3 - <““ |“left“> // „“=empty for one reagent station; „left“=<global_txt_15>
380 Reagent rack %1 %2 is not present While running routine a reagent rack has been removed.
Scan and replace the reagent rack.
%1 - <indicated rack position>
%2 - <““ |“left“ |“right“> // „“=empty for one reagent station; „left“=<global_txt_15>; „right“=<global_txt_16>
381 Reagent rack %1 %2 is not present (arm stopped)

While pipetting a reagent rack has been removed. Scan and replace the reagent rack.
%1 - <indicated rack position>
382 Wrong reagent rack in position %1 %2 inserted

While running routine a reagent rack has been removed and another reagent rack has been placed in this reagent
slot. Scan and place the same rack as before the “Routine start”.
%1 - <indicated rack position number>
383 Reagent rack in wrong position %1 %2 inserted (needed in position %3)

While running routine a reagent rack has been removed, scanned and inserted in another reagent slot as before the
“Routine start”. Place the rack in the specified position.
%1 - <rack position number>
%3 - <indicated rack position number>
230
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
384 Wrong liquid %1 in position %2 (needs %3) inserted

While running routine a reagent rack has been removed, another reagent has been inserted in a position on the rack
as before the “Routine start”. Place the reagent in the specified position.
%1 - <name of liquid> // e.g. „RE A“, „BU“, „BU A“, „CLEAN“=<m_reag_p_txt_28>, „CAL.BU“=<m_reag_p_txt_29>
%2 - <prep. number>
%3 - <indicated liquid name> // e.g. „RE A“, „BU“, „BU A“, „CLEAN“=<m_reag_p_txt_28>, „CAL.BU“=<m_reag_p_
txt_29>
385 Liquid %1 missing in position %2

While running routine a reagent from a reagent rack has been removed, scanned and inserted back. Replace the
reagent or a new bottle of the same reagent in the speci-fied position.
%1 - <indicated liquid name> // e.g. „RE A“, „BU“, „BU A“, „CLEAN“=<m_reag_p_txt_28>, „CAL.BU“=<m_reag_p_
txt_29>
%2 - <prep. number>
386 Needles are not in Wash Position

When exiting “Maintenance”, the needles must be moved into the wash position. Select the “Wash Position” item.
387 Reagent rack not scanned %1 %2

While running routine a reagent rack has been inserted without scanning. Scan and insert the reagent rack.
%1 - empty
%2 - empty
388 Quality control setup for test %1 not ok %2

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “QC set up”. After leaving the menu with ESC, the message appears
with detailed information. When re-calling the menu, the cursor goes to the position of incorrect entry. Check and
correct the entries according to the indicated information.
%2 - empty
389 Quality control setup not ok. Please exit!

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “QC set up”. After leaving the menu with ESC, the message appears
with detailed information. When re-calling the menu, the cursor goes to the position of incorrect entry. Check and
correct the entries according to the indicated information.
390 Liquid not ok: lot no. is empty %1

%1 - empty
391 Same control plasma only one time per test allowed %1
Two control plasmas with the same name has been entered in the menu “QC set up”. Please change one of the the
two names.
%1 - empty
392 Too many controls selected for start (max. %1)

Too many controls have been selected. Please select only so many controls according to the indicated information.
393 Liquid not ok: date expired %1

%1 - empty
www.biolabo.fr 231
Service manual
Messages
394 Liquid%1 not ok: expiry date is already defined as %2

%1 - empty
395 Two or more bottles of same control plasma %1 not allowed (pos. %2)
Two or more bottles of same control plasma has been scanned and inserted. Please insert only one bottle.
%1 - <name of control plasma>
%2 - <prep. number>
396 Elevator not in Home. Remove all cuvette racks. Press <ENTER> %1
Elevator movement interrupted. Quit the software and restart. Check elevator encoder and home position via “Ad-
justing”.
%1 - empty
397 Remove all cuvette racks. Press <ENTER> %1

When selecting “Maintenance, Incubator, Strip backwards out of incubator ” this message appears. Remove all cuvet-
te racks.
%1 - empty
398 Measuring block not in meas. position. Please Exit! %1

The measuring block is not in measuring position. This message require the routine software to be quit and re-star-
ted. After the restart, ensure that there are no racks in the transport channel (except the rack in Waiting position) up
to the point of rack ejection on the measuring block. If this is the case, remove them manually. Check sensors and
motors via “Adjusting”.
399 Test %1: control plasma %2 with new pseq. %3. Please check target values!
A new control plasma (new PSN) has been scanned and inserted. Enter the new target values according to the pa-
ckage insert.
%1 - <test abbreviation> // e.g. „A“, „B“, .
%2 - <name of control plasma>
400 Test %1: calibration plasma %2 with new pseq. %3.

Please check Ref values!
A new calibration plasma (new PSN) has been scanned and inserted. Enter the new reference values according to
the package insert.
%2 - <name of calibration plasma>
401 %1 different pseq. for the same liquid not allowed

402 %1: wash volume ok %2

In the menu maintenance “Volume check” the needle check the pipetted liquid level automatically. The volume is ok
--- not more used ----
%2 - empty
232
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
403 %1: wash volume not ok %2

In the menu maintenance “Volume check” the needle check the pipetted liquid level automatically. The volume is
not ok. Please check whether the needle is blocked. Check the tube for leaks and the tube connection.
%2 - empty
404 %1 scan not ok (%2 positions not possi-ble) %3

Incorrect reagent rack scanned. Please scan again.
%2 - (<received number>)
%3 - empty
405 %1 new reagent rack found. Please scan again (3 times)! %2

A new reagent rack has been scanned. Please scan 3 times to save this reagent rack in the Database.
%2 - (<received rack rfid>, <received number rack posi-tions>)
406 %1 reagent rack known with %2 positions. Please scan again! %3

Incorrect reagent rack scanned. Please scan again.
%2 - (<indicated number of positions>)
%3 - (<received rack rfid>, <received number rack posi-tions>)
407 ASTM parameter for test %1 not ok %2

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “Mainte-nance, System parameters, Host communication”. Check
and correct the entries according to the indicated infor-mation.
%2 - empty
408 ASTM parameter not ok. Please exit!

409 ASTM test not ok: number %1 already defined %2

%1 - <indicated number>
%2 - (test <test abbreviation>) // e.g. „A“, „B“, ...
410 ASTM test not ok: unit is empty %1

%1 - empty
411 Host online

The Host communication is ok.
412 %1: programming of scanner barcode parameters failed. Please exit! %2

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “Mainte-nance, Barcode types“, Host communication”. Check and
correct the entries.
%1 - <“RC-Plasma“|“RC-Reagent“> // „RC-Plasma“=<global_txt_42>; „RC-Reagent“=<global_txt_43>
www.biolabo.fr 233
Service manual
Messages
413 %1 position %2 liquid is not defined %3

Scanned reagent is not defined in the menu “reagent set up”, “calibration set up” or “QC set up”. Please enter this
liquid in min. one of these menue or remove the bottle. azl
%2 - <prep. number>
%3 - (m:<manufact.>, t:<type>, rId:<reagent Id>) // scanned values
414 %1 position %2 empty cups only in ‚%3 rack‘ possible %4

The calibration vials has been scanned and inserted in an 6 position rack. Please use only the 8- or 10-position rack
for the calibration vials.
%2 - <prep. number>
%3 - „8, 10“
%4 - (m:<manufact.>, t:<type>, rId:<reagent Id>) // scanned values
415 %1: constantly busy during init. Please Exit! %2

dule via “Adjusting”. azl
%1 - „TRC“ // „TRC“=<global_txt_08>
%2 - empty
416 Copy not allowed: channel types dif-ferent! %1

This message occurs only in „Maintenance“ / „Test to/from X“ if channel type of tests are different. azl
%1 - (<test level of copy test>; <test level of actual test>)
417 Liquid%1 not ok: abbreviation of liquid is already defined as %2

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “reagent set up” or “calibration set up”. After leaving the menu with
ESC, the message appears with detailed information. When re-calling the menu, the cursor goes to the position of
incorrect entry. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information. (Wenn der Name der Liquids
gleich ist, dann muss auch die Liq-Nr gleich sein. azl)
%1 - empty
%2 - ‚<liquid abbreviation>‘ // e.g. „RE“, „BU“
418 Liquid%1 not ok: test of liquid is already defined as %2

incorrect entry. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information. (Wenn der Name der Liquids
gleich ist, dann muss auch die Liq-Test-Nr gleich ein. azl)
%1 - empty
%2 - ‚<test abbreviation>‘ // e.g. „A“, „B“, ...
419 Liquid%1 not ok: lot no. of liquid is al-ready defined as %2

incorrect entry. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information. (“calibration set up”: wenn der
Name der Liquids gleich ist, dann muss auch die Lot-Nr gleich sein;“reagent set up”: wenn die Liq-Nr und die Liq-
Test-Nr gleich sind, dann muss auch die Lot-Nr der Liquids gleich sein. azl )
%1 - empty
%2 - ‚<lot number>‘
420 Liquid%1 not ok: name of liquid is already defined as %2

incorrect entry. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information. (Wenn die Liq-Nr. und die Liq-
Test-Nr. gleich sind, dann muss auch der Name der Liquids gleich sein. azl)
%1 - empty
%2 - ‚<name of liquid>‘
234
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
421 Liquid%1 not ok: stability time of liquid is already defined as %2

incorrect entry. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information.(Wenn der Name der Liquids
gleich ist, dann muss auch die „stability time“ gleich sein. azl ) (Wenn die Liq-Nr. und die Liq-Test-Nr. gleich sind,
dann muss auch „stability time“ der Liquids gleich sein. azl)
%1 - empty
%2 - ‚<stability time of liquid>‘
422 Liquid%1 in reagent preparation %2 not defined %3

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu „reagent block“. After leaving the menu with ESC, the message ap-
pears with detailed information. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information. Liquid must
be defined in menu “reagent set up” or “calibration set up”. azl
%1 - ‚<liquid name>‘ // e.g. „RE A“, „BU“, „BU A“
%2 - <prep. number>
%3 - empty
423 In the first %1 lines must be a right value

Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu „Calibra-tion“ value table for test with calibrator set. After leaving
indicated information. The value table must have a line for each in menu “calibration set up” defined liquid. azl
424 %1 different pseq. in one calibrator set not allowed %2

m) Incorrect setting has been entered in the menu “cali-bration set up”. After leaving the menu with ESC, the mes-
sage appears with detailed information. When re-calling the menu, the cursor goes to the position of incorrect
entry. Check and correct the entries according to the indicated information.
e) A calibration plasma with different pseg has been scanned. Please scan calibrator set with the equal pseg. (defi-
ned in the menu “calibration set up”). azl
%1 - m): <“Test“><“ ‚“><test abbreviation><“‘:“> // „Test“=<global_txt_56>; test abbreviation e.g. „A“, „B“
%1 - e): <“RC-Reagent“:><“ „><“pos.“><“ „><prep number> // „RC-Reagent“=<global_txt_43>; „pos.“=<global_
txt_57>
%2 - m): empty
%2 - e): <“(„><“Test“><“ „><test abbreviation><“)“> // „Test“=<global_txt_56>; test abbreviation e.g. „A“, „B“
425 %1 different manu-facturer in one cali-brator set not allowed %2

A calibration plasma with different manufacturer has been scanned. Please scan calibrator set with the equal manu-
facturer. (defined in the menu “calibration set up”). azl
txt_57>
%2 - m): empty
426 %1 different type in one calibrator set not allowed %2

A calibration plasma with different liquid type has been scanned. Please scan calibrator set with the equal liquid
type. (defined in the menu “calibration set up”). azl
txt_57>
%2 - m): empty
www.biolabo.fr 235
Service manual
Messages
427 %1 different expiry date in one calibrator set not allowed %2

A calibration plasma with different expiry date has been scanned. Please scan calibrator set with the equal expiry
date. (defined in the menu “calibration set up”). azl
txt_57>
%2 - m): empty
428 %1 equal liquid Id in one calibrator set not allowed %2

A calibrator set with two equal liquids has been scanned. Please scan calibrator set with the liquids defined in the
menu “calibration set up”. azl
txt_57>
%2 - m): empty
429 Scan ‚%1 rack‘ with 1ml of 5% bleach in cal.vial in pos. %2, insert in %3 reag. st. >ENTER
When selecting the “Probe clean” menu item in “Maintecance”, the bleach must be inserted in the reagent station.
Follow the instructions in the message box. azl
%1 - <“10“>
%2 - prep. number
430 Test %1 needs for calibration %2 calibration plasma %3

%1 - ‚<test abbreviation>‘ // e.g. „A“, „B“, ...
%3 - empty
431 Calibration type ‚%1‘ not possible %2

This message occurs at <ENTER> in menu „Calibration“ on button „Calbrator set“(„Automatic“), „Uni calibrator“(„Fully
Aut.“) or „RE-CAL“. If in menu „calibration set up“ calibrator set defined, fully calibration not possible and vice versa.
azl
%1 - <“Automatic“ |“Fully Aut.“ |“RE-CAL“> // „Automat-ic““=<m_calmen_txt_00>; „Fully Aut.“=<m_calmen_txt_01>;
„RE-CAL“=<m_calmen_txt_08>
%2 - empty
432 Please open the cover now %1

This message occurs at <ENTER> in menu „Main“ on button „Maintenance“ („Hardware“) if cover present. azl
%1 - empty
433 Please close the cover now %1

This message occurs at leaving menu „Maintenance“ („Hardware“) if cover not present. azl
%1 - empty
434 Menu entrance not permitted,

calibration not avail-able This message occurs at <ENTER> in „Calibration“ menu on button „Curve“ if channel
closed and calibration not ok. azl
236
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Messages
www.biolabo.fr 237
Service manual
Software Installation
The chapter describes each step to install the needed software to work with the analyzer. You will need the fol-
lowing items in order to install the operating system and the instrument software
1 USB stick with Linux (Debian) operating system, analyzer-software and probe positions.
Table of content
Operating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Installation preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
BIOS configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Installing the operating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
After the OS installation... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Set time and date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Config Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Config Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Analyzer Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Installing the analyzer software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Reinstalling (or updating) the software.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
www.biolabo.fr 239
Service manual
Operating system
Installation preparation
Connect all components with the computer
▪▪ Keyboard
▪▪ Monitor
▪▪ Mouse
▪▪ Printer
BIOS configuration
The BIOS is password protected. To change BIOS
options you must enter the Supervisor Password
first.
The BIOS is configured to boot from Hard Drive

only.
All other devices are disabled.

Configure the BIOS for booting from USB. There
are different ways to enter BIOS. (example: press
c or press m).. Enable USB Boot and change
the Hard Drive Order to boot from the Stick.
Please refer to the information on the screen.
Change BIOS options and settings if necessary.
Save changes and exit.
After the installation you should still disable USB
Boot.
240
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Installing the operating system

▪▪ Insert the USB stick with the OS and switch on the PC as well as the rest of the components. On the screen,
“Debian(Vers.XY) Stick” is displayed. Confirm with e to start the installation. The start procedure may take
ca. 40-50 seconds. If necessary reboot the PC and repeat the steps. The installation will start automatically
▪▪ In the first step, always select the American English keyboard layout.
▪▪ Choose “guided” – use entire disk partitioning method.
www.biolabo.fr 241
Service manual
▪▪ Select disk to partition; to install, choose the hard disk.

Attention:
If you continue with the installation, all data on the hard disk will be permanently deleted! See select_disk
Attention:
By selecting the USBstick, the data on the USBstick will be damaged!
▪▪ The installation may take up to 20-25 minutes. New partitions are

created and formatted during the installation process.
▪▪ Install the GRUB boot loader to the master boot record confirm with YES.
▪▪ Installation is complete. Remove all installation media and continue with reboot.
242
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
After the OS installation.

The system will reboot. If the system stops, then reboot
manually. The Roche login console appears.
Login as “Service” user. The GUI for Service appears.
Country specified settings:

Depending on the country and used hardware following settings must be adapted.
▪▪ Local time and time zone The default local time zone is Europe/Zurich.
▪▪ Keyboard layout. By using a a country specific layout it is need to adapt in the system.
▪▪ Depending on the used Screen. it is needed to adapt the right resolution manually.
Set time and date

This desktop icon is used to set the system time and date
Procedure:
▪▪ Double click to the icon. CONFIG DATE TIMEon the LINUX GUI.
▪▪ Click on TIME ZONE; select your area. You
can use the search field, to find easly
cour country.Summer and wintertime
is automatically changed

www.biolabo.fr 243
Service manual
▪▪ Select TIME AND DATE.

▪▪ Now set the right time and date.
▪▪ Press OK to close the window.
Config Display
This desktop icon is used to adapt the screenreso-
lution
Procedure:
▪▪ Double click to the icon CONFIG
KEYBOARD.on the LINUX GUI
▪▪ Select the the resulution which
fit for your used Monitor.
Select SAVE AS DEFAULT and after confirm with OK
244
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Config Keyboard
In case to use a different layout than the US layout it is
possible to config the Keyboard layout.
Procedure
▪▪ Double click to the icon CONFIG KEYBOARD on the LINUX GUI

▪▪ Select the laypout from the list and confirm with SAVE
▪▪ leave the window with QUIT.
▪▪ After the changes, reboot the PC.
Notice: the changes are not visible. Each time you open the window,
the selection bar show s„english“
www.biolabo.fr 245
Service manual
Analyzer Software
Installing the analyzer software

▪▪ Login as SERVICE.
▪▪ Root Password is required.Insert the USB Stick with the software (wait approx. 20 seconds) and click on the icon
labelled “Thrombolyzer Installation”. Please press e to quit after the installation is completed.
▪▪ Log-out of the GUI to make the changes active. Login again.
System parameter loading

▪▪ Insert the USBstick with the analyzer parameters.
▪▪ Execute Restore Options: Start “Maintenance” Application, and choose RESTORE PARAMETERS. The
message “Success” appears after the parameters have been successfully restored.
▪▪ Start Adjusting Application, and select Sampler Management. Choose READ POSITIONS FROM USB STICK to load the
sampler positions.
246
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
▪▪ The software installation for the analyzer is now complete.
Reinstalling (or updating) the software.

▪▪ In order to reinstall the software or update the current software, you need to insert the USB stick. Click
on the icon labelled “Thrombolyzer installation”. Any existing settings, system parameters or test parameters
will NOT be removed.
▪▪ Plug in the USB stick containing the software (wait approx. 20 seconds)
and click on the icon labeled “Thrombolyzer Installation”
▪▪ Root password is required.
▪▪ Please press e to quit after the installation is completed.
▪▪ Logout of the GUI to make the changes active. Login again.
▪▪ Execute Restore Options:
▪▪ Plug in the USBstick.
▪▪ Start the “Maintenance” application, and choose RESTORE PARAMETERS The message “Success” appears after the
parameters have been successfully restored.
▪▪ Start the “Adjusting” application, and select SAMPLER MANAGEMENT. Select READ POSITIONS FROM USB STICK to load the
sampler positions. The software installation for the analyzer is now completed.
www.biolabo.fr 247
Service manual
248
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Analyzer Installation
The chapter describes each step to install the analyzer till to be ready to start the liquid tests to verify a successful
installation.
Table of content
Installation procedure overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Description of installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Information for return shipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
www.biolabo.fr 249
Service manual
Installation procedure summary

Note: Please do not turn on the units until instructed to do so!
Preconditions
▪▪ The analyzer is unpackaged.
▪▪ PC is packaged (original box)
▪▪ Monitor is packaged (original box)
▪▪ All accessories parts are complete.
▪▪ A total of three mains sockets are required (without printer).
▪▪ All mains cables should run over a common socket in order to be protected by the same fuse.
▪▪ Depending on the location use a UPS.
Procedure
▪▪ Unpack and mount the monitor.
▪▪ Unpack the PC.
▪▪ Remove the transport safety plug and install the waste cover.
▪▪ Verify the horizontal orientation of the analyzer. Use an water level bubble. If need screw out the analyzer feeds
▪▪ Connect all Data cables and all mains cables to the units (monitor, PC, mouse, analyzer,printer)Connect
the cables between the units and screw on connectors if necessary. (See „connecting overview“ below)
▪▪ Place covers in their positions.
▪▪ Insert the cuvette register filled with cuvettes.
▪▪ Fill the fresh water reservoir with distilled or de-ionised water.
▪▪ Attach washing- and waste-liquid tubes as well as the water sensor.
▪▪ Attach the pipetting tube to the dilutor and the probe and ensure that the tube will not interfere with operations.
▪▪ Assemble the probe.
▪▪ Check the condition and position of the Hamilton syringe.
▪▪ The analyzer, the printer, the monitor and the PC should be switched on in this order.
▪▪ When the system has fully booted, login as Service.
▪▪ Start the Adjusting program; copy the accompanying PROBE POSITION
at PROBE MANAGEMENT > READ POSITION from USB stick.
▪▪ Correct and/or fine-tune the probe positions according to lab preferences.
▪▪ Fill the tube system by activating FILL SYSTEM two times.
▪▪ Test liquid sensors via LIQUID SYSTEM in respect to stability and sensitivity.
▪▪ Check LED range via the Adjusting program (OPTICS>LED RANGE 405 AND 620NM).
▪▪ After re-starting the “routine” software, select VOLUME CHECK under menu item MAINTENANCE
Connecting overview
▪▪ The USB cable connects the analyzer and the computer.
▪▪ The monitor cable is connected to the computer.
▪▪ The mains cable of the monitor is connected to the mains socket.
▪▪ The keyboard is connected to the computer.
▪▪ Mouse is connected to the computer.
▪▪ The printer cable (USB) connects the computer and the printer.
▪▪ The mains cables of the analyzer, computer and printer are connected to the mains socket.
▪▪ Establish the connection to the host computer (if available).
250
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Description of installation
Note: Please do not turn on the units until instructed to do so!
The system consists of the following units and parts

▪▪ Analyzer
▪▪ Computer
▪▪ Monitor
▪▪ Keyboard
▪▪ Mouse
▪▪ All needed Data and mains cables and tubes.
▪▪ Initial accessories
Plug in the mains cables only when the units are switched off.
Attach the connecting cables only when the units are switched off. Do not pinch (squash) the liquid tube.
Enviromental conditions:
▪▪ Horizontal installation space (see specifications)
▪▪ The working load capacity of the desk must exceed 80kg
▪▪ Dust free enviroment with adequate ventilation.
▪▪ No direct sunlight.
▪▪ No perceptible vibration
▪▪ No equipment generating electromagnetic waves in the near vicinity.
▪▪ No machines discharging ultrahigh frequencies.
www.biolabo.fr 251
Service manual
Analyzer un-packaging
▪▪ Remove the restraining straps
around the carton and pallet. ID Descriptionw
▪▪ Open the box at the top.
▪▪ Push the side walls to the restraining straps
outside and lift them up.
accessory box
▪▪ Remove the front and back wall.
▪▪ Remove the two white 1
white foam
foam side protectors.
▪▪ Remove the accessory box. dust cover
▪▪ Use the cutouts in the lower
white foam shell to firmly
grip the instrument. 2
▪▪ Remove the dust cover.
▪▪ Remove the transport safety plug
and install the waste cover.
▪▪ Verify the horizontal orientation
of the analyzer. Use an water
level bubble. If need screw
out the analyzer feeds.
▪▪ Remove the blue tape and
open the protection cover. 4
▪▪ Remove the protection foam.
3 3
Notice:
If possible, please store the pallet, the Box, the protective foam protectors, restraining straps and the measuring
block transport securing plug for later use.
Connecting the water container and liquid waste container

Two liquid containers are delivered with the analyzer. Liquid and solid waste containers must be provided by the
laboratory.
Connecting the tubes to the connectors
▪▪ Remove the nut from the connectors and stick the proper tube through the corresponding nut.
▪▪ Push the tubes tightly to the connector. Replace and tighten the nut.
▪▪ The liquid waste tube (5mm/5m) is in the accessories box. Cut the tube to the right length.
▪▪ Connected one end to “OUT” and the other end inserted into the liquid waste container.
▪▪ The water level sensor for the liquid container is in the accessories box.
▪▪ The end of the tube should stick 1 - 2 cm out of the sensor.
▪▪ If not, remove the white plastic cap and remove single screw on top, next to the corner.
▪▪ Now you can pull the tube more out. Put the cover back and tighten the screw.
▪▪ Insert the sensor through the lid of the container. The tube is then connected to “IN” and the cable to “Sensor”.
252
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Assembly of the probe

Check the straightness of the probe
▪▪ You need a flat base (Table, Top cover of the analyzer).
▪▪ Place the probe on the base and push the brazen support with one finger to the base.
▪▪ Roll the probe slowly forward and backwards.
▪▪ The top of the probe should stay in a parallel position to the base.
▪▪ In case of up and down movements, bend the probe so it becomes straight.
Probe assembly
▪▪ Move the X/Y axis of sampler manually to the front.
▪▪ Press the silver locking cap of the probe support upwards.
▪▪ Insert the probe so that the golden part is upwards.
▪▪ Fix the probe in the probe guide. Protect the probe with probe clip.
Pipetting tube assenbly

▪▪ Pull the black protection tube over the Pipetting tube (both
you find in the accessory box) The outstand of the pipetting Hole
tube should stick approx. 10cm out of the protection tube.
▪▪ To have slightly movement of the black tube, add a little silicone
oil in the black tube before insert the pipetting tube.
▪▪ Insert the end of the tube in the hole on the
left upper cornder, in the dilutors area.
▪▪ Fix with one hand the pipetting tube end with the nut. With the
other hand crap behind the sampler and pull the tube to the front.
▪▪ Screw the pipetting tube into the dilutor’s valve.
▪▪ Push the tube tightly over the top of the probe and then pull
the black protection tube back into the end position.
▪▪ Thread the tube over the tube-holder on the sampler cover.
Tube holder
www.biolabo.fr 253
Service manual
Plug connection
Connect following plugs to the analyzer

▪▪ Mains cable to the mains connector.
▪▪ USB cable to the PC interface
▪▪ LIS connection ( 0-Modem cable) if used.
Connect following plugs to the PC

▪▪ Mains cable to the Mains connector of the PC and Monitor.
▪▪ The VGA cable from the monitor to the VGA port.
▪▪ The USB cable from the analyzer, to one USB port on the PC.
▪▪ The USB dongle from the analyzer keyboardand mouse.
Switching on
Make sure that all necessary connections are complete and well pluged in.
Switch on the devices in the following manor
▪▪ Analyzer
▪▪ Monitor
▪▪ Printer (if installed)
▪▪ PC
Login
The login screen will appear after the computer has been turned on and the boot sequence has completed. Login
under the username “labhead”, ”routine” or ”service”.
Select the username by using the Keyboard:

▪▪ Enter the first character
▪▪ Press Enter
▪▪ Enter the appropriate password
Change the labhead password (optional)
▪▪ Login as Service
▪▪ “KDE” / “System” / “KUser (user manager)”
▪▪ Enter the administrator password
▪▪ Select “labhead“ from the list and press Enter
▪▪ Press the icon “Set password”
▪▪ Enter the new password and verify with OK.
Reading the probe positions from USB stick

Each analyzer has its own individual USB stick, where all important positions have been saved. The probe position
must be copied after turning the analyzer on for the first time. Otherwise, the positions for pipetting are not accura-
te.
▪▪ Loin as „service“
▪▪ Start the „Adjusting program“.
▪▪ After the Adjusting Program has started, the analyzer will need about ten seconds to process
information. You can follow this process by viewing the information displayed in the Message Box.
▪▪ Connect the USB stick to the USB port and wait 2sec.
▪▪ Select PROBE MANAGEMENT>READ POSITIONS FROM USB STICK.
▪▪ “Success” will appear in the message box if the data was loaded successfully.
254
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Testing the correct probe positions

The probe positions need to be controlled after the SAMPLER POSITIONS have been loaded from the
USB stick! In order to control the positions, both the pipetting probe and the pipetting tube need to be correctly
installed. In addition, the cuvette register needs to be filled and put into position!
Procedure
▪▪ Adjusting SAMPLER POSITIONS.
▪▪ Select HOME.
▪▪ Select TEST POSITION.
The tip of the probe must be directly over the reference point (red point on the rack transport unit).
Slight manual corrections can be made manual (slightly bending the probe) if the probe position is not 100% cor-
rect. This can be done as long as the difference is not more than 1.5 mm.
Check the positioning at each unit.

▪▪ Cuvettes positions
▪▪ Plasma positions
▪▪ Predilution positions
▪▪ Reagent positions
If positions are not acceptable, please modify the settings via the „adjusting program“ and save the modification on
the USB stick.
Refer to the Service Manual section “Operations”.
Exit the Adjusting Program by EXIT and the start the routine via LOGIN.
Temperature check
Reagent station
Pipett 2ml Water in position 5 of the reagent block.
Waiting time is 10 min. Target value 18°C +/- 2 (thermometer).

Pipett 100µl water in the test hole, wait 1 min. before measuring (thermometer). Target: 40,5°C (+/- 0,8°C)
Measuring unit
Pipett 100µl water in the test hole, wait 1 min. before measuring (thermometer). Target: 38°C (+/- 0,8°C)
Fill system
Select the menu item LIQUID SYSTEM > FILL SYSTEM. Confirm with e.
The analyzer’s liquid system is filled with water.
Exit the work field with ^.
www.biolabo.fr 255
Service manual
Check Liqud level sensor

Prepare a Hitachi cup with 350µl of NaCl 0,9% and a second hitachi cup with 250µl NaCL 0,9%
Mark the cups with a marker to avoid confusion.
▪▪ Place the cup with 350µl in the plasma position X1.
▪▪ Select the menu item LIQUID SYSTEM > TEST SENSITIVITY OF LIQUID SENSOR
▪▪ The analyzer must detect the liqud and the message appear „Sampler: liquid found“ in the message box.
▪▪ Replace the cup with the cup with 250µl and repead.
▪▪ The analyzer should not detect the liqud and the message appear „Sampler: liquid not found“ in the message box.
▪▪ Readjust the sensor if the function is not working as described. (refer to chapter: „operation“)
Needle check
▪▪ Start the routine program.
▪▪ Open the protection cover
▪▪ Select menu item HARDWARE> PROBE CHECK. Confirm with e.
▪▪ Put the test cup on the wash station and press e. The pipetting stream should be
vertical and should come out of the needle as a single stream. After this has been done, the
tip of the needle should be checked for any development of water drops. Water droplets
on the tip of the needle are an indication that the system might be leaky.
256
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Information for return shipment

Preparing for packing
Before the analyzer is switched off or disconnected from the computer, it is important to do the following steps in
order to install the measuring block transport safety plug:
▪▪ Remove case ejection flap
▪▪ The analyzer must be on and connected to the computer
▪▪ Log in as “Service” and start the Adjusting program
▪▪ Drive the measuring block in the correct position by activating SENSORS > MEASURING POSITION PROCESS
▪▪ Insert the transport safety plug
▪▪ Exit the menu item with ^
▪▪ Disconnect the tube for the wash water (IN)
▪▪ Select LIQUID SYSTEM > FILL SYSTEM
▪▪ Exit the menu item with ^ and exit Adjusting
The analyzer can now be turned off and prepared for packing.
Remove all not fixed or locked parts from the Analyzer:
▪▪ Cuvette rack register
▪▪ Cuvettes in the transport area
▪▪ Transport covers
▪▪ Reagent cover
▪▪ Reagent racks
▪▪ Predilution racks
▪▪ Sample racks
▪▪ Probe
▪▪ Liquid tubes (Pipetting tubes, waste tube, fresh water tube)
▪▪ All cables
▪▪ TFT mounting unit
Lock the transfer with a strap or 5mm PVC tube. Don’t use tape!
Lock position: z-axis down, in the back and right.
Packaging
The following describes how to package the analyzer with an original box.
Do this only if the analyzer is being shipped in the original box (or replacement box).
▪▪ Place the restraining straps securely around the carton and pallet.
www.biolabo.fr 257
Service manual
Printer Installation
This chapter describes the the procedure to install a printer to the analyzer.Before installing a printer, make sure the
printer is connected to the PC and switched on. Then restart the PC.
Important!
Recommended printers for Linux systems support postscript and/or PCL5e /PCL6 printer languages.
Note:
If the printer is known to the system, the driver will be installed automatically, and the printer appears in the
config printer mask.
Table of content
Printer installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
www.biolabo.fr 259
Service manual
Printer installation
▪▪ Login as “Service” user. To install a printer, click the CONFIG PRINTERS icon from desktop.
The Configure Module appears, click the add button and select printer.
▪▪ Choose the connected printer from the list and continue with the installation if the printer is
connected to the PC. There is a slight delay while the system searches for the correct driver.
260
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
▪▪ Choose the Generic driver and press FORWARD.
▪▪ Choose the model PCL5e printer and select generic PCL5e printer foomatic/hpijs-
pcl5e driver. Most laser printers support this driver. For printers which support postscript,
select Generic driver, model Postscript printer and foomatic/postscript.
▪▪ Continue. with FORWARD
▪▪ You can change the name of the printer (alphanumeric characters without blanks), for example, Laserjet.
Press OK
www.biolabo.fr 261
Service manual
Note
If the printer is known to the system, the driver will be installed automatically.
▪▪ If neccessary set the printer as default

▪▪ TIck the box MAKE DEFAULT and confirm with APPLY
262
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
▪▪ To change the properties click on the printer options f. e. Page size or Quality (resolution) of the printout.
www.biolabo.fr 263
Service manual
264
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication
Host communication
This chapter describes the serial communication of a host computer with the PC with OS Linux.
The host computer is connected via serial interface (rs232, v24) to the PC.
Network communication (LAN) host to PC:
This communication is described in a separate document.
Table of content
Communication of PC with the host computer (serial). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Uni-directional transfer (transfer in one direction).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Bi-directional transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
www.biolabo.fr 265
Service manual
Host communication
Communication of PC with the host computer (serial)

Host computer is connected to the PC via a serial interface (rs232, v24).
Different connection types are defined for serial communication between the PC and the host computer: uni-direc-
tional Behnk, bi-directional Behnk.
Uni-directional offers the transfer of measuring results to the host computer. Bi-directional additionally allows the
PC to request tests for the samples from the host computer.
Interface parameters ‘baudrate’, ‘data bits’, ‘stop bits’ and ‘parity’ are changed via program MAINTENANCE > SYSTEM PARAME-
TERS.
Character set
The character set for serial communication is ASCII (0x00 - 0x7F, 0 - 127).
Characters in data fields may contain ASCII codes 0x20 - 0x7F (32 - 127). The data delimiter character vertical stroke,
‘|’ (ASCII code ‘7C’) may not be used in the data fields.
Data Characters outside ASCII (0x20 - 0x7F, 32 - 127) range

If it is absolutely necessary to transfer data characters outside the ASCII (0x20 - 0x7F, 32 - 127) range, they are en-
coded as utf-8 characters. This is useful only for field ‘ID No.’
Attention: Interface parameter ‘data bits’ must be 8. Length of data fields is calculated in utf-8 characters not
in unicode characters.
266
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication
Uni-directional transfer (transfer in one direction)

The connection between the instrument and the host computer appears as follows:
1 - Plasma Prep. / Measurement => Database / Results
The measured values of the analyzer are stored in the Result database.
2 - Database / Results => Host computer
The test results of a given patient or quality control are transferred to the host computer as they are in the database
There are two methods for sending results to the host computer:
www.biolabo.fr 267
Service manual
Host communication
1. Method: The test results are always immediately transferred to the host computer and
simultaneously entered in the PC database.
2. Method: The test results are first entered in the database and can be transferred by the user
to the host computer by means of the menu.
The methods for data transfer are set in the maintenance program under menu item System Parameter - Validation.
“Validation” - “No” Method 1

“Validation” - “Yes” Method 2
Two different transfer methods can be set in the Maintenance program with Method 1 (Validation “NO”): “after each
patient” and “after each patient and each Quality Control”.
More detailed explanations regarding the individual transfer methods can be found in Section 2.2.4 Data block.
Protocol
When transferring data, the following “ASCII control codes” are added: <STX>, <ETX>, <RS>, <GS>. These codes
indicate the beginning and the end of data transmissions, results and error control.
<STX> = indicates the beginning of data transmission.
<ETX> = indicates the end of data transmission.
<RS> = a data block follows this character.
<GS> = a check sum follows this character.
The character sequence <CR><LF> is added to each control character and data record.
Example:
<STX><CR><LF>
<RS>[data record]<CR><LF>
<GS>[check sum]<CR><LF>
<ETX><CR><LF>
Check sum
The check sum consists of two ASCII codes which are transmitted after ASCII code <GS>. It is calculated by adding
the 8-bit binary values of all codes, starting with <RS> and ending with <GS>.
Example
>STX><CR><LF>
<RS>PATIENT<CR><LF>
<GS>67<CR><LF>
<ETX><CR><LF>
The following codes are used for calculating:

<RS>PATIENT<CR><LF>
<GS>
Code 8-Bit binary value

<RS> 0001 1110
P 0101 0000
A 0100 0001
T 0101 0100
I 0100 1001
E 0100 0101
N 0100 1110
T 0101 0100
<CR> 0000 1101
<lf> 0000 1010
<gs> 0001 1101
8-bit binary value of the check sum: 0110 0111

ASCII-Code of the check sum: 6 7
268
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication
Record block construction for sending test results.

The data record has a fixed length. Each data record begins with <RS>, followed by the individual data which is
separated by so-called data delimiters, and ends with <CR><LF>.
This data record for transferring results is constructed as follows.
<RS> ( 1 character )
Thrombo-ID ( 20 characters) optional
Data delimiter ( 1 character )
ID ( 1 character )
Block. No. ( 2 or 4 characters) optional
Prep. No. ( 2 characters) optional
ID No. ( 30 characters)
Test ( 2 characters)
Calculation type ( 1 character )
Single / Double ( 1 character ) optional
Error Flag 1 ( 3 characters) optional
Error Flag 2 ( 3 characters)
Measuring time ( 6 characters)
Measuring value ( 7 characters)
INR value ( 4 characters)
<CR><LF> ( 2 characters)
▪▪ A vertical stroke, ‘|’ (ASCII code ‘7C’) is used as a data delimiter between the individual data.
▪▪ Thrombo ID is the name of theAnalyzeras entered in the Maintenance program under System Parameter”. (If not
20 characters long, fill out with blanks). This field can be transferred as an option (is set in maintenance under “Set
Upload Fields”).
ID indicates the type of data record (1 character long).
▪▪ Block No. indicates the number of the plasma block (sample tray, 2 or 4 characters long).
This can be set as an option in the maintenance program. The number of characters
depends on the device: see number of characters for Block No. in Sample Prep.
▪▪ Prep. No. indicates the position of the plasma tube in the sample tray (2 characters
long). This can also be set as an option in the maintenance program.
▪▪ ID No. consists of the patient’s name or ID No. which is filled out with blanks if not 30 characters long.
Test consists of the number (0-39) of the test. Enter a blank before all single digit numbers.
▪▪ Calculation type consists of a number corresponding to the type of
measuring value calculation. This field contains always 0.
www.biolabo.fr 269
Service manual
Host communication
▪▪ Single / Double indicates whether a test is to be carried out as a single or double

determination (1 character long, the 0 is set for single determinations and the 1 for double
determinations). The transfer can be set as an option in the maintenance program.
▪▪ Error flag 1 and error flag 2 transfer a number from the error flag list (the transfer of the error flag can be selected
by the maintenance program: no error flag, one error flag or both error flags are transferred). Each error flag is
transferred with three characters.
Should both error flags be transferred, the second error flag relates to the measurement repetition. Should
the measurement not be repeated, the second error flag is set to “1” (meaning no flag is resent).
▪▪ Measuring time contains the measured coagulation time (6 characters long).
▪▪ Measuring value consists of the determined measuring value (7 characters long).
▪▪ INR value consists of the calculated INR value or entry 0.0 in the event that
no INR value is to be calculated for the test (4 characters long).
The data record for transferring quality control results appears as follows
Thrombo ID. ( 20 characters) optional
ID ( 1 character )
Block. No. ( 2 or 4 characters) optional
Prep. No. ( 2 characters) optional
Name of the control plasma ( 12 characters)
Lot No. of the control plasma ( 12 characters)
Test ( 2 characters)
Calculation type ( 1 character )
Single / Double ( 1 character ) optional
Error flag 1 ( 3 characters) optional
Error flag 2 ( 3 characters)
Measuring time ( 6 characters)
Measuring value ( 7 characters)
INR value ( 4 characters)

▪▪ Thrombo ID., refer to patient results,
▪▪ ID., refer to patient results,
▪▪ Block. No., refer to patient results,
▪▪ Prep. No., refer to patient results,
▪▪ Name of the control plasma (12 characters long),
▪▪ Lot No. of the control plasma (12 characters long),
▪▪ Test, refer to patient results,
270
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication
▪▪ Calculation type, refer to patient results,

▪▪ Single / Double, refer to patient results,
▪▪ Error flag 1 / Error flag 2, refer to patient results,
▪▪ Measuring time, refer to patient results,
▪▪ Measuring value, refer to patient results,
▪▪ INR value, refer to patient results,
Data block
Either individual data records or several records in succession can be transmitted. This depends upon the number
of tests to be conducted for a given patient. If only one test is conducted, only one data record is sent along with a
<GS> code and the check sum. If several tests are conducted for a given patient, several data records are correspon-
dingly sent in succession. The check sum for the entire data block is calculated and then sent.
Example

<STX> <CR> <LF>
<RS> [Data record] <CR><LF>

<GS> [Check sum] <CR> <LF>

<ETX> <CR> <LF>
As already mentioned, results can be directly transferred to the host computer after measurement completion from
the database or automatically (Validation ”No”). By means of the setting, Validation “No,” two different transfer me-
thods are available: (after each patient, after each patient and quality control).
After each patient

The measuring results are only transferred after a given patient’s plasma has been completely processed and ente-
red in the database. The test results on a given patient consisting of all tests conducted are transferred in one data
block. Quality control results are not sent with this type of transfer.
Important: The ID. for “automatic transferring of patient results” is “9”.
After each patient / quality control

After processing has been completed and results entered in the database, patient as well as quality control results
are transferred.
Important! The ID. for “automatic transferring of patient results” is “9” and the ID. for “automatic transferring
of quality control results” is “A”.
The possibility always exists to transfer results from the database to the host subsequently, independent of which
validation setting has been selected in the maintenance program. Patient data can be marked for transfer in the da-
tabase (SHIFT and arrow keys). Communication is initiated upon pressing <F5>. Several patients can be marked and
transferred. One data block per patient is transferred. Within the data block of a given patient, all tests entered in the
database are transferred in individual data records. Individual tests are not marked and transferred in this case. The
transfer corresponds to the automatic transfer “Validation-No” – “after each patient.”
Important! The ID. for “transferring patient results from the database” is “1”.
The transfer of quality control results works the same way.
www.biolabo.fr 271
Service manual
Host communication
Important! The ID. for “transferring quality control results from the database” is “2”.
Examples for transferring data

Examples for automatically transferring patient results (Thrombo ID and Block No off ).
Example 1
<STX><CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11
<RS>9|_0|Kurt-Bendig___________________|_0|3|1|_66|__1|__29.5|__50.00|_0.3<CR><LF>
<GS>C5<CR><LF>
<ETX><CR><LF> 5
1. Transmission ID 7. Error flag 1

2. Prep. number 8. Error flag 2
3. ID number 9. Measuring time
4. Test 10. Measuring value
5. Calculation type 11. INR value
6. Single/double
Example 2
<STX><CR><LF>
<RS>9|_1|100263________________________|_2|0|0|_60|__1|__34.2|___0.00|_0.0<CR><LF>
<GS>5C<CR><LF>
<ETX><CR><LF>
Example 3
<STX><CR><LF>
<RS>9|_2|Willi_Meyer____________________|_0|3|1|_66|__1|__30.1|__25.00|_0.3<CR><LF>
<RS>9|_2|Willi_Meyer____________________|_1|0|1|_48|__1|__36.7|___0.00|_0.0<CR><LF>
<RS>9|_2|Willi_Meyer___________________|_2|0|0|_60|__65|_30.1|___0.00|_0.0<CR><LF>
<RS>9|_2|Willi_Meyer___________________|34|2|0|_66|__1|__30.1|_230.8_|_1__<CR><LF>
<GS>E3<CR><LF>
<ETX><CR><LF>
Example for transferring the patient results from the database

<STX><CR><LF>
<RS>1|_0|Kurt_Bendig___________________|_0|3|1|_66|__1|__29.5|__50.00|_0.3<CR><LF>
<GS>BD<CR><LF>
272
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication
<ETX><CR><LF>
Examples for automatically transferring the quality control results:
1 2 3 4 5 7 9 10 11 12
<RS>A|-5|PreciClot-1-|645.089-6---|-2|0|0|-60|--1|--41.7|---0.00|-0.0<CR><LF>
<GS>E1<CR><LF>
<ETX><CR><LF>
6 8
Transmission ID
Prep. number
Control plasma name
LOT number
Test
Calculation type
single/ double detemination
Example 2
<STX><CR><LF>
<RS>A|_6|PreciClot_2_|645.089_6___|_2|0|0|_60|__1|__42.0|___0.00|_0.0<CR><LF>
<GS>DE<CR><LF>
<ETX><CR><LF>
Example for transferring the quality control results from the database
Example
www.biolabo.fr 273
Service manual
Host communication
<STX><CR><LF>
<RS>2|-3|V2__________|02__________|_0|3|1|_64|__1|__31.3|__11.53|-0.3<CR><LF>
<GS>xx<CR><LF>
<ETX><CR><LF>
Bi-directional transfer
The connection of the analyzer to the host computer appears as follows
1 - Analyzer => Host Computer
274
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication
The ID No. of the patient is read into analyzer with the integrated barcode scanner, and an inquiry is started by the
PC to the host. The inquiry can also be started by keyboard from the Sample Prep. menu. Press p for one patient or
jp key combination for several patients.
2 - Host Computer => analyzer
After the inquiry, the host sends the tests to be carried out on a given patient to the analyzer.
3 and 4 same as 1 and 2 in the uni-directional description.
Protocol
In addition to the already mentioned “ASCII control characters,” which are used with a uni-directional data transfer,
the following two control characters are necessary: <ACK>, <NAK>.
<ACK> --> positive response after controlling the check sum
(transfer successful)
<NAK> --> negative response after controlling the check sum

(transfer not successful)
Data record construction when transferring the ID. No

The data record for transferring the ID. No. to the host is built up as follows:
▪▪ <RS> ( 1 character )
▪▪ Thrombo ID. (20 characters) optional
▪▪ Data delimiter ( 1 character )
▪▪ ID. ( 1 character )
▪▪ Prep. No. ( 2 characters)
▪▪ ID. No. (30 characters)
▪▪ <CR><LF> ( 2 characters)
The ASCII code ‘|’ (ASCII Code ‘7C’) once again serves as a data delimiter between ID. and ID. No.
▪▪ Thrombo ID., Please refer to section 2.2.3 for the description.

▪▪ ID. indicates the type of data record, in this case code = ‘0’ for ‘Inquiries about tests,’
▪▪ Prep. No. indicates the position of the plasma tube in the sample holder
(2 characters long, starting from 0).
▪▪ ID No. contains the patient’s name or number (filled out with blanks if not 30 characters long).
Example
Inquiry about the tests to be carried out on the patient ‘Kurt Bendig’ at patient-prep. position ‘6’.
Analyzer --> Host Computer
<STX><CR><LF>
Data record construction on transfer of tests to be carried out
1 2 3
1. Transmission ID
2. Prep. number
3. ID number of the
Patient
<RS>0|_6|Kurt_Bendig___________________<CR><LF>
<GS>3F<CR><LF>
Analyzer <-- host computer
<ACK>
Analyzer --> host computer
www.biolabo.fr <ETX><CR><LF> 275
Service manual
Host communication
If the patient is known to the host computer, and the tests to be conducted are entered, a data record with the ID., ‘0’
is sent from the host to the analyzer.
Thrombo ID. (20 characters) optional
ID. ( 1 character )
Prep. No. ( 2 characters)
Emergency ( 1 character ) optional
ID. No. (30 characters)
Test 1 ( 2 characters)
Data delimiter ( 1 character ) optional
▪▪ Thrombo ID., Please refer to section 2.2.3 for the description.

▪▪ ID., ‘0’ when the patient is known and the tests are entered.
▪▪ Prep. No., Please refer to section 2.2.3 for the description.
▪▪ Emergency marks the patient as an emergency patient. 0 = ‘normal’. 1 = ‘emergency’. Optional.
▪▪ Test 1 to Test 9 contain the number of tests to be carried out. (In the case that fewer
than 9 tests are to be carried out, ‘99’ is entered); Test 1 to Test 9 are separated with data
delimiters; tests are transferred as an index, i.e., Test A = 0, Test B = 1, Test C = 2 etc.
276
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication
Example
The tests 0, 1, 3, 5 and 8 are to be carried out on patient ‘Kurt Bendig’ with the Prep.No. ‘9.’
Host computer --> Analyzer

<STX><CR><LF>
1 1 1 1
<RS>0|_9|Kurt_Bendig___________________|_0|_1|_3|_5|_8|99|99|99|99<CR><LF>
<GS>07<CR><LF>
1. Transmission ID
2. Prep. number
3. ID number
4. Test
Host computer <-- Analyzer

<ACK>
Host computer -->Analyzer
<ETX><CR><LF>
If the patient is unknown or no tests have been entered, then the ID. is set to ‘1.’ ‘99’ is sent back each time for Test 1
to Test 9. In previous versions, only 6 tests could be transferred from the host to Analyzer.
Example emergency request

Patient ‘Kurt Bendig’ is an emergency patient. The tests 0 and 1 are to be carried out.

<STX><CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
<RS>0|_9|1|Kurt_Bendig___________________|_0|_1|99|99|99|99|99|99|99<CR><LF>
<GS>xx<CR><LF>
1. Transmission ID
2. Prep. number
3. Emergency
4. ID number
5. Test
Host computer <-- Analyzer

<ACK>
<ETX><CR><LF>
www.biolabo.fr 277
Service manual
Host communication
Summary of the ID.’s
Analyzer to host:
Transmission ID
0: Test inquiry
1: Complete patient results (from the database).
2: Complete quality control result (from the database).
9: Complete patient result (automatic).
A: Complete quality control result (automatic).
Host to Analyzer:
Transmission ID
0: The patient is known to the host, and at least one test should be conducted.
1: The patient is unknown to the host, no tests should be conducted.
Transfer monitoring, transfer errors

Each time a check sum has been sent, the relevant computer waits for a response, i.e. <ACK> or <NAK>. Should a
defined time be overridden upon waiting for a response, the same message is transferred again. Should several
attempts be unsuccessful, the connection is interrupted and noted in the error database.
Example Timeout:
Analyzer Host computer
STX ----------------------------------->
RS (Data block) -------------------------->
GS (Check sum) -------------------------->
W A I T
RS (Data block) -------------------------->
GS (Check sum) -------------------------->
W A I T
RS (Data block) -------------------------->
GS (Check sum) -------------------------->
W A I T
ETX ----------------------------------->
If <NAK> is sent back as a response, the same data block is transferred again. If the transfer is successful, <ETX> is
sent.
Example NAK/ACK
Analyzer Host computer
STX ----------------------------------->
RS (Data block) -------------------------->
GS (Check sum) -------------------------->
<-------------------------------------- NAK
RS (Data block) -------------------------->
GS (Check sum) -------------------------->
<-------------------------------------- ACK
ETX ----------------------------------->
278
www.biolabo.fr
Service manual
Host communication
If <NAK> is repeatedly sent back as a response, the transfer is interrupted after a defined number of unsuccessful
attempts.
Example:
Analyzer
STX ----------------------------------->
RS (Data block) -------------------------->
GS (Check sum) -------------------------->
<-------------------------------------- NAK
RS (Data block) -------------------------->
GS (Check sum) -------------------------->
<-------------------------------------- NAK
RS (Data block) -------------------------->
GS (Check sum) -------------------------->
<-------------------------------------- NAK
ETX ----------------------------------->
Tips for testing

Set both interfaces (PC and host computer) to 9600 Baud, no Parity, 8 Data bits, 2 Stop bits.
First test the simple type of data transfer. Select UNI-DIRECTIONAL TRANSFER in the Maintenance program and set validati-
on to “YES”. Then change to theAnalyzerprogram and type p on one patient out of the patient database.
www.biolabo.fr 279
Service manual
Host communication
If this transfer is successful, change to BI-DIRECTIONAL TRANSFER in Maintenance and restart the same procedure. Then
mark several patients with <SHIFT-arrow keys> and initiate the transfer with p.
The next step is to move to SAMPLE PREP.; input a patient’s name (must be known to the host) and start INQUIRY FOR TESTS
with p The desired tests must appear in the test field. An INQUIRY FOR TESTS for several patients can be started with the
key combination jp.
Possible errors
The following errors are often made when setting up the host communication:
▪▪ “Transfer tests to be carried out”:Analyzer answers with <ACK>. The host must answer
with <ETX><CR><LF>. In some implementations <CR><LF> is missing.
▪▪ “Receive/Transmit Thrombo-ID” in maintenance menu must be “NO” for most host interfaces.
▪▪ The Prep No starts with 0 (always 1 lower than the number in Plasma Prep).
▪▪ On logical transfer errors (f.e. test not available) theAnalyzersends an <ACK>.
280
www.biolabo.fr

Service Manual Solea 100 (En) (2014-V01)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Solea 100 (En) (2014-V01)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service manual

Version: SM_Solea 100_en_Dez2014_V01

Preventive maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Trouble shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Software Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Analyzer Installation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Printer Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Host communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

General safety information

General safety information

General safety information

All biological substances should be regarded as a potential source of infection!

General safety information

Meaning of the warnings used in these instructions.

DANGER! This information is for your own safety.

General safety information

OFF (mains switch)

Caution, observe documentation

Warning of dangerous high voltage

Warning of a hot surface

Warning of a biological hazard

Warning of hand injuries

Warning of laser beam

Please refer to the user manual

Returned goods and environmentally compliant disposal.This instrument is clas-

1. Excellent reproducibility 1. normal plasma

Cuvette rack register

Control button bar 1

Sampler arm (X/Y axis)

Cuvette rack register

Sampler arm (X/Y axis)

Control button bar

Sample barcode reader

Control button bar

Alarm off button

Alarm off button

Left analyzer side

Wash water connector 1

Waste water connector

Wash water connector

Waste water connector

Cuvette volume limits

Barcode scanner (optional)

The Login Screen

User definitions and rights

Login as labhead or routine:

Routine with protocol

Adjusting with protocol

Starting the module

(a2) Name of labor

(a4) Head of labor

(b1) System language

(b2) System date format

(b3) System time format

(b4) Sound Hardware

(b5) Number of alarms

Restricted user interface:

(c1) External scanner

(c2) Reagent Lot No Check

(d7) Control plasma in position

(d8) Control causes flags

(e1) Number of reagent blocks

(e2) Reagent mix-time (minutes)